ASTContext.cpp revision 77534c7051b30f0443b3f79e3dfe6b1d8e66b957
1//===--- ASTContext.cpp - Context to hold long-lived AST nodes ------------===// 2// 3// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure 4// 5// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source 6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. 7// 8//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 9// 10// This file implements the ASTContext interface. 11// 12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 13 14#include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h" 15#include "CXXABI.h" 16#include "clang/AST/ASTMutationListener.h" 17#include "clang/AST/Attr.h" 18#include "clang/AST/CharUnits.h" 19#include "clang/AST/Comment.h" 20#include "clang/AST/CommentCommandTraits.h" 21#include "clang/AST/DeclCXX.h" 22#include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h" 23#include "clang/AST/DeclTemplate.h" 24#include "clang/AST/Expr.h" 25#include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h" 26#include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h" 27#include "clang/AST/Mangle.h" 28#include "clang/AST/MangleNumberingContext.h" 29#include "clang/AST/RecordLayout.h" 30#include "clang/AST/RecursiveASTVisitor.h" 31#include "clang/AST/TypeLoc.h" 32#include "clang/Basic/Builtins.h" 33#include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h" 34#include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h" 35#include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h" 36#include "llvm/ADT/StringExtras.h" 37#include "llvm/Support/Capacity.h" 38#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h" 39#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h" 40#include <map> 41 42using namespace clang; 43 44unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructors; 45unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared; 46unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructors; 47unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared; 48unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructors; 49unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared; 50unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators; 51unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared; 52unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators; 53unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared; 54unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructors; 55unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared; 56 57enum FloatingRank { 58 HalfRank, FloatRank, DoubleRank, LongDoubleRank 59}; 60 61RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(const Decl *D) const { 62 if (!CommentsLoaded && ExternalSource) { 63 ExternalSource->ReadComments(); 64 CommentsLoaded = true; 65 } 66 67 assert(D); 68 69 // User can not attach documentation to implicit declarations. 70 if (D->isImplicit()) 71 return NULL; 72 73 // User can not attach documentation to implicit instantiations. 74 if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) { 75 if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation) 76 return NULL; 77 } 78 79 if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) { 80 if (VD->isStaticDataMember() && 81 VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation) 82 return NULL; 83 } 84 85 if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) { 86 if (CRD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation) 87 return NULL; 88 } 89 90 if (const ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *CTSD = 91 dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D)) { 92 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = CTSD->getSpecializationKind(); 93 if (TSK == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation || 94 TSK == TSK_Undeclared) 95 return NULL; 96 } 97 98 if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) { 99 if (ED->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation) 100 return NULL; 101 } 102 if (const TagDecl *TD = dyn_cast<TagDecl>(D)) { 103 // When tag declaration (but not definition!) is part of the 104 // decl-specifier-seq of some other declaration, it doesn't get comment 105 if (TD->isEmbeddedInDeclarator() && !TD->isCompleteDefinition()) 106 return NULL; 107 } 108 // TODO: handle comments for function parameters properly. 109 if (isa<ParmVarDecl>(D)) 110 return NULL; 111 112 // TODO: we could look up template parameter documentation in the template 113 // documentation. 114 if (isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(D) || 115 isa<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(D) || 116 isa<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(D)) 117 return NULL; 118 119 ArrayRef<RawComment *> RawComments = Comments.getComments(); 120 121 // If there are no comments anywhere, we won't find anything. 122 if (RawComments.empty()) 123 return NULL; 124 125 // Find declaration location. 126 // For Objective-C declarations we generally don't expect to have multiple 127 // declarators, thus use declaration starting location as the "declaration 128 // location". 129 // For all other declarations multiple declarators are used quite frequently, 130 // so we use the location of the identifier as the "declaration location". 131 SourceLocation DeclLoc; 132 if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<ObjCContainerDecl>(D) || 133 isa<ObjCPropertyDecl>(D) || 134 isa<RedeclarableTemplateDecl>(D) || 135 isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D)) 136 DeclLoc = D->getLocStart(); 137 else { 138 DeclLoc = D->getLocation(); 139 // If location of the typedef name is in a macro, it is because being 140 // declared via a macro. Try using declaration's starting location 141 // as the "declaration location". 142 if (DeclLoc.isMacroID() && isa<TypedefDecl>(D)) 143 DeclLoc = D->getLocStart(); 144 } 145 146 // If the declaration doesn't map directly to a location in a file, we 147 // can't find the comment. 148 if (DeclLoc.isInvalid() || !DeclLoc.isFileID()) 149 return NULL; 150 151 // Find the comment that occurs just after this declaration. 152 ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator Comment; 153 { 154 // When searching for comments during parsing, the comment we are looking 155 // for is usually among the last two comments we parsed -- check them 156 // first. 157 RawComment CommentAtDeclLoc( 158 SourceMgr, SourceRange(DeclLoc), false, 159 LangOpts.CommentOpts.ParseAllComments); 160 BeforeThanCompare<RawComment> Compare(SourceMgr); 161 ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator MaybeBeforeDecl = RawComments.end() - 1; 162 bool Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc); 163 if (!Found && RawComments.size() >= 2) { 164 MaybeBeforeDecl--; 165 Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc); 166 } 167 168 if (Found) { 169 Comment = MaybeBeforeDecl + 1; 170 assert(Comment == std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(), 171 &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare)); 172 } else { 173 // Slow path. 174 Comment = std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(), 175 &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare); 176 } 177 } 178 179 // Decompose the location for the declaration and find the beginning of the 180 // file buffer. 181 std::pair<FileID, unsigned> DeclLocDecomp = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc(DeclLoc); 182 183 // First check whether we have a trailing comment. 184 if (Comment != RawComments.end() && 185 (*Comment)->isDocumentation() && (*Comment)->isTrailingComment() && 186 (isa<FieldDecl>(D) || isa<EnumConstantDecl>(D) || isa<VarDecl>(D) || 187 isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<ObjCPropertyDecl>(D))) { 188 std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentBeginDecomp 189 = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getBegin()); 190 // Check that Doxygen trailing comment comes after the declaration, starts 191 // on the same line and in the same file as the declaration. 192 if (DeclLocDecomp.first == CommentBeginDecomp.first && 193 SourceMgr.getLineNumber(DeclLocDecomp.first, DeclLocDecomp.second) 194 == SourceMgr.getLineNumber(CommentBeginDecomp.first, 195 CommentBeginDecomp.second)) { 196 return *Comment; 197 } 198 } 199 200 // The comment just after the declaration was not a trailing comment. 201 // Let's look at the previous comment. 202 if (Comment == RawComments.begin()) 203 return NULL; 204 --Comment; 205 206 // Check that we actually have a non-member Doxygen comment. 207 if (!(*Comment)->isDocumentation() || (*Comment)->isTrailingComment()) 208 return NULL; 209 210 // Decompose the end of the comment. 211 std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentEndDecomp 212 = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getEnd()); 213 214 // If the comment and the declaration aren't in the same file, then they 215 // aren't related. 216 if (DeclLocDecomp.first != CommentEndDecomp.first) 217 return NULL; 218 219 // Get the corresponding buffer. 220 bool Invalid = false; 221 const char *Buffer = SourceMgr.getBufferData(DeclLocDecomp.first, 222 &Invalid).data(); 223 if (Invalid) 224 return NULL; 225 226 // Extract text between the comment and declaration. 227 StringRef Text(Buffer + CommentEndDecomp.second, 228 DeclLocDecomp.second - CommentEndDecomp.second); 229 230 // There should be no other declarations or preprocessor directives between 231 // comment and declaration. 232 if (Text.find_first_of(";{}#@") != StringRef::npos) 233 return NULL; 234 235 return *Comment; 236} 237 238namespace { 239/// If we have a 'templated' declaration for a template, adjust 'D' to 240/// refer to the actual template. 241/// If we have an implicit instantiation, adjust 'D' to refer to template. 242const Decl *adjustDeclToTemplate(const Decl *D) { 243 if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) { 244 // Is this function declaration part of a function template? 245 if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getDescribedFunctionTemplate()) 246 return FTD; 247 248 // Nothing to do if function is not an implicit instantiation. 249 if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation) 250 return D; 251 252 // Function is an implicit instantiation of a function template? 253 if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getPrimaryTemplate()) 254 return FTD; 255 256 // Function is instantiated from a member definition of a class template? 257 if (const FunctionDecl *MemberDecl = 258 FD->getInstantiatedFromMemberFunction()) 259 return MemberDecl; 260 261 return D; 262 } 263 if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) { 264 // Static data member is instantiated from a member definition of a class 265 // template? 266 if (VD->isStaticDataMember()) 267 if (const VarDecl *MemberDecl = VD->getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember()) 268 return MemberDecl; 269 270 return D; 271 } 272 if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) { 273 // Is this class declaration part of a class template? 274 if (const ClassTemplateDecl *CTD = CRD->getDescribedClassTemplate()) 275 return CTD; 276 277 // Class is an implicit instantiation of a class template or partial 278 // specialization? 279 if (const ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *CTSD = 280 dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(CRD)) { 281 if (CTSD->getSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation) 282 return D; 283 llvm::PointerUnion<ClassTemplateDecl *, 284 ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *> 285 PU = CTSD->getSpecializedTemplateOrPartial(); 286 return PU.is<ClassTemplateDecl*>() ? 287 static_cast<const Decl*>(PU.get<ClassTemplateDecl *>()) : 288 static_cast<const Decl*>( 289 PU.get<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *>()); 290 } 291 292 // Class is instantiated from a member definition of a class template? 293 if (const MemberSpecializationInfo *Info = 294 CRD->getMemberSpecializationInfo()) 295 return Info->getInstantiatedFrom(); 296 297 return D; 298 } 299 if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) { 300 // Enum is instantiated from a member definition of a class template? 301 if (const EnumDecl *MemberDecl = ED->getInstantiatedFromMemberEnum()) 302 return MemberDecl; 303 304 return D; 305 } 306 // FIXME: Adjust alias templates? 307 return D; 308} 309} // unnamed namespace 310 311const RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForAnyRedecl( 312 const Decl *D, 313 const Decl **OriginalDecl) const { 314 D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D); 315 316 // Check whether we have cached a comment for this declaration already. 317 { 318 llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos = 319 RedeclComments.find(D); 320 if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) { 321 const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second; 322 if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) { 323 if (OriginalDecl) 324 *OriginalDecl = Raw.getOriginalDecl(); 325 return Raw.getRaw(); 326 } 327 } 328 } 329 330 // Search for comments attached to declarations in the redeclaration chain. 331 const RawComment *RC = NULL; 332 const Decl *OriginalDeclForRC = NULL; 333 for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(), 334 E = D->redecls_end(); 335 I != E; ++I) { 336 llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos = 337 RedeclComments.find(*I); 338 if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) { 339 const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second; 340 if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) { 341 RC = Raw.getRaw(); 342 OriginalDeclForRC = Raw.getOriginalDecl(); 343 break; 344 } 345 } else { 346 RC = getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(*I); 347 OriginalDeclForRC = *I; 348 RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw; 349 if (RC) { 350 Raw.setRaw(RC); 351 Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromDecl); 352 } else 353 Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl); 354 Raw.setOriginalDecl(*I); 355 RedeclComments[*I] = Raw; 356 if (RC) 357 break; 358 } 359 } 360 361 // If we found a comment, it should be a documentation comment. 362 assert(!RC || RC->isDocumentation()); 363 364 if (OriginalDecl) 365 *OriginalDecl = OriginalDeclForRC; 366 367 // Update cache for every declaration in the redeclaration chain. 368 RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw; 369 Raw.setRaw(RC); 370 Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromRedecl); 371 Raw.setOriginalDecl(OriginalDeclForRC); 372 373 for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(), 374 E = D->redecls_end(); 375 I != E; ++I) { 376 RawCommentAndCacheFlags &R = RedeclComments[*I]; 377 if (R.getKind() == RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) 378 R = Raw; 379 } 380 381 return RC; 382} 383 384static void addRedeclaredMethods(const ObjCMethodDecl *ObjCMethod, 385 SmallVectorImpl<const NamedDecl *> &Redeclared) { 386 const DeclContext *DC = ObjCMethod->getDeclContext(); 387 if (const ObjCImplDecl *IMD = dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(DC)) { 388 const ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = IMD->getClassInterface(); 389 if (!ID) 390 return; 391 // Add redeclared method here. 392 for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::known_extensions_iterator 393 Ext = ID->known_extensions_begin(), 394 ExtEnd = ID->known_extensions_end(); 395 Ext != ExtEnd; ++Ext) { 396 if (ObjCMethodDecl *RedeclaredMethod = 397 Ext->getMethod(ObjCMethod->getSelector(), 398 ObjCMethod->isInstanceMethod())) 399 Redeclared.push_back(RedeclaredMethod); 400 } 401 } 402} 403 404comments::FullComment *ASTContext::cloneFullComment(comments::FullComment *FC, 405 const Decl *D) const { 406 comments::DeclInfo *ThisDeclInfo = new (*this) comments::DeclInfo; 407 ThisDeclInfo->CommentDecl = D; 408 ThisDeclInfo->IsFilled = false; 409 ThisDeclInfo->fill(); 410 ThisDeclInfo->CommentDecl = FC->getDecl(); 411 comments::FullComment *CFC = 412 new (*this) comments::FullComment(FC->getBlocks(), 413 ThisDeclInfo); 414 return CFC; 415 416} 417 418comments::FullComment *ASTContext::getLocalCommentForDeclUncached(const Decl *D) const { 419 const RawComment *RC = getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(D); 420 return RC ? RC->parse(*this, 0, D) : 0; 421} 422 423comments::FullComment *ASTContext::getCommentForDecl( 424 const Decl *D, 425 const Preprocessor *PP) const { 426 if (D->isInvalidDecl()) 427 return NULL; 428 D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D); 429 430 const Decl *Canonical = D->getCanonicalDecl(); 431 llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, comments::FullComment *>::iterator Pos = 432 ParsedComments.find(Canonical); 433 434 if (Pos != ParsedComments.end()) { 435 if (Canonical != D) { 436 comments::FullComment *FC = Pos->second; 437 comments::FullComment *CFC = cloneFullComment(FC, D); 438 return CFC; 439 } 440 return Pos->second; 441 } 442 443 const Decl *OriginalDecl; 444 445 const RawComment *RC = getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(D, &OriginalDecl); 446 if (!RC) { 447 if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<FunctionDecl>(D)) { 448 SmallVector<const NamedDecl*, 8> Overridden; 449 const ObjCMethodDecl *OMD = dyn_cast<ObjCMethodDecl>(D); 450 if (OMD && OMD->isPropertyAccessor()) 451 if (const ObjCPropertyDecl *PDecl = OMD->findPropertyDecl()) 452 if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(PDecl, PP)) 453 return cloneFullComment(FC, D); 454 if (OMD) 455 addRedeclaredMethods(OMD, Overridden); 456 getOverriddenMethods(dyn_cast<NamedDecl>(D), Overridden); 457 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Overridden.size(); i < e; i++) 458 if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(Overridden[i], PP)) 459 return cloneFullComment(FC, D); 460 } 461 else if (const TypedefNameDecl *TD = dyn_cast<TypedefNameDecl>(D)) { 462 // Attach any tag type's documentation to its typedef if latter 463 // does not have one of its own. 464 QualType QT = TD->getUnderlyingType(); 465 if (const TagType *TT = QT->getAs<TagType>()) 466 if (const Decl *TD = TT->getDecl()) 467 if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(TD, PP)) 468 return cloneFullComment(FC, D); 469 } 470 else if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *IC = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(D)) { 471 while (IC->getSuperClass()) { 472 IC = IC->getSuperClass(); 473 if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(IC, PP)) 474 return cloneFullComment(FC, D); 475 } 476 } 477 else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CD = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(D)) { 478 if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *IC = CD->getClassInterface()) 479 if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl(IC, PP)) 480 return cloneFullComment(FC, D); 481 } 482 else if (const CXXRecordDecl *RD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) { 483 if (!(RD = RD->getDefinition())) 484 return NULL; 485 // Check non-virtual bases. 486 for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_const_iterator I = 487 RD->bases_begin(), E = RD->bases_end(); I != E; ++I) { 488 if (I->isVirtual() || (I->getAccessSpecifier() != AS_public)) 489 continue; 490 QualType Ty = I->getType(); 491 if (Ty.isNull()) 492 continue; 493 if (const CXXRecordDecl *NonVirtualBase = Ty->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) { 494 if (!(NonVirtualBase= NonVirtualBase->getDefinition())) 495 continue; 496 497 if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl((NonVirtualBase), PP)) 498 return cloneFullComment(FC, D); 499 } 500 } 501 // Check virtual bases. 502 for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_const_iterator I = 503 RD->vbases_begin(), E = RD->vbases_end(); I != E; ++I) { 504 if (I->getAccessSpecifier() != AS_public) 505 continue; 506 QualType Ty = I->getType(); 507 if (Ty.isNull()) 508 continue; 509 if (const CXXRecordDecl *VirtualBase = Ty->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) { 510 if (!(VirtualBase= VirtualBase->getDefinition())) 511 continue; 512 if (comments::FullComment *FC = getCommentForDecl((VirtualBase), PP)) 513 return cloneFullComment(FC, D); 514 } 515 } 516 } 517 return NULL; 518 } 519 520 // If the RawComment was attached to other redeclaration of this Decl, we 521 // should parse the comment in context of that other Decl. This is important 522 // because comments can contain references to parameter names which can be 523 // different across redeclarations. 524 if (D != OriginalDecl) 525 return getCommentForDecl(OriginalDecl, PP); 526 527 comments::FullComment *FC = RC->parse(*this, PP, D); 528 ParsedComments[Canonical] = FC; 529 return FC; 530} 531 532void 533ASTContext::CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, 534 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Parm) { 535 ID.AddInteger(Parm->getDepth()); 536 ID.AddInteger(Parm->getPosition()); 537 ID.AddBoolean(Parm->isParameterPack()); 538 539 TemplateParameterList *Params = Parm->getTemplateParameters(); 540 ID.AddInteger(Params->size()); 541 for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(), 542 PEnd = Params->end(); 543 P != PEnd; ++P) { 544 if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) { 545 ID.AddInteger(0); 546 ID.AddBoolean(TTP->isParameterPack()); 547 continue; 548 } 549 550 if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) { 551 ID.AddInteger(1); 552 ID.AddBoolean(NTTP->isParameterPack()); 553 ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getType().getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr()); 554 if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) { 555 ID.AddBoolean(true); 556 ID.AddInteger(NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes()); 557 for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) { 558 QualType T = NTTP->getExpansionType(I); 559 ID.AddPointer(T.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr()); 560 } 561 } else 562 ID.AddBoolean(false); 563 continue; 564 } 565 566 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP = cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P); 567 ID.AddInteger(2); 568 Profile(ID, TTP); 569 } 570} 571 572TemplateTemplateParmDecl * 573ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl( 574 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP) const { 575 // Check if we already have a canonical template template parameter. 576 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 577 CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(ID, TTP); 578 void *InsertPos = 0; 579 CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm *Canonical 580 = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 581 if (Canonical) 582 return Canonical->getParam(); 583 584 // Build a canonical template parameter list. 585 TemplateParameterList *Params = TTP->getTemplateParameters(); 586 SmallVector<NamedDecl *, 4> CanonParams; 587 CanonParams.reserve(Params->size()); 588 for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(), 589 PEnd = Params->end(); 590 P != PEnd; ++P) { 591 if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) 592 CanonParams.push_back( 593 TemplateTypeParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(), 594 SourceLocation(), 595 SourceLocation(), 596 TTP->getDepth(), 597 TTP->getIndex(), 0, false, 598 TTP->isParameterPack())); 599 else if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP 600 = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) { 601 QualType T = getCanonicalType(NTTP->getType()); 602 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T); 603 NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *Param; 604 if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) { 605 SmallVector<QualType, 2> ExpandedTypes; 606 SmallVector<TypeSourceInfo *, 2> ExpandedTInfos; 607 for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) { 608 ExpandedTypes.push_back(getCanonicalType(NTTP->getExpansionType(I))); 609 ExpandedTInfos.push_back( 610 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(ExpandedTypes.back())); 611 } 612 613 Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(), 614 SourceLocation(), 615 SourceLocation(), 616 NTTP->getDepth(), 617 NTTP->getPosition(), 0, 618 T, 619 TInfo, 620 ExpandedTypes.data(), 621 ExpandedTypes.size(), 622 ExpandedTInfos.data()); 623 } else { 624 Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(), 625 SourceLocation(), 626 SourceLocation(), 627 NTTP->getDepth(), 628 NTTP->getPosition(), 0, 629 T, 630 NTTP->isParameterPack(), 631 TInfo); 632 } 633 CanonParams.push_back(Param); 634 635 } else 636 CanonParams.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl( 637 cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P))); 638 } 639 640 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonTTP 641 = TemplateTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(), 642 SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(), 643 TTP->getPosition(), 644 TTP->isParameterPack(), 645 0, 646 TemplateParameterList::Create(*this, SourceLocation(), 647 SourceLocation(), 648 CanonParams.data(), 649 CanonParams.size(), 650 SourceLocation())); 651 652 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 653 Canonical = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 654 assert(Canonical == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); 655 (void)Canonical; 656 657 // Create the canonical template template parameter entry. 658 Canonical = new (*this) CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm(CanonTTP); 659 CanonTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(Canonical, InsertPos); 660 return CanonTTP; 661} 662 663CXXABI *ASTContext::createCXXABI(const TargetInfo &T) { 664 if (!LangOpts.CPlusPlus) return 0; 665 666 switch (T.getCXXABI().getKind()) { 667 case TargetCXXABI::GenericARM: 668 case TargetCXXABI::iOS: 669 return CreateARMCXXABI(*this); 670 case TargetCXXABI::GenericAArch64: // Same as Itanium at this level 671 case TargetCXXABI::GenericItanium: 672 return CreateItaniumCXXABI(*this); 673 case TargetCXXABI::Microsoft: 674 return CreateMicrosoftCXXABI(*this); 675 } 676 llvm_unreachable("Invalid CXXABI type!"); 677} 678 679static const LangAS::Map *getAddressSpaceMap(const TargetInfo &T, 680 const LangOptions &LOpts) { 681 if (LOpts.FakeAddressSpaceMap) { 682 // The fake address space map must have a distinct entry for each 683 // language-specific address space. 684 static const unsigned FakeAddrSpaceMap[] = { 685 1, // opencl_global 686 2, // opencl_local 687 3, // opencl_constant 688 4, // cuda_device 689 5, // cuda_constant 690 6 // cuda_shared 691 }; 692 return &FakeAddrSpaceMap; 693 } else { 694 return &T.getAddressSpaceMap(); 695 } 696} 697 698static bool isAddrSpaceMapManglingEnabled(const TargetInfo &TI, 699 const LangOptions &LangOpts) { 700 switch (LangOpts.getAddressSpaceMapMangling()) { 701 case LangOptions::ASMM_Target: 702 return TI.useAddressSpaceMapMangling(); 703 case LangOptions::ASMM_On: 704 return true; 705 case LangOptions::ASMM_Off: 706 return false; 707 } 708 llvm_unreachable("getAddressSpaceMapMangling() doesn't cover anything."); 709} 710 711ASTContext::ASTContext(LangOptions& LOpts, SourceManager &SM, 712 const TargetInfo *t, 713 IdentifierTable &idents, SelectorTable &sels, 714 Builtin::Context &builtins, 715 unsigned size_reserve, 716 bool DelayInitialization) 717 : FunctionProtoTypes(this_()), 718 TemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()), 719 DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()), 720 SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks(this_()), 721 GlobalNestedNameSpecifier(0), 722 Int128Decl(0), UInt128Decl(0), Float128StubDecl(0), 723 BuiltinVaListDecl(0), 724 ObjCIdDecl(0), ObjCSelDecl(0), ObjCClassDecl(0), ObjCProtocolClassDecl(0), 725 BOOLDecl(0), 726 CFConstantStringTypeDecl(0), ObjCInstanceTypeDecl(0), 727 FILEDecl(0), 728 jmp_bufDecl(0), sigjmp_bufDecl(0), ucontext_tDecl(0), 729 BlockDescriptorType(0), BlockDescriptorExtendedType(0), 730 cudaConfigureCallDecl(0), 731 NullTypeSourceInfo(QualType()), 732 FirstLocalImport(), LastLocalImport(), 733 SourceMgr(SM), LangOpts(LOpts), 734 AddrSpaceMap(0), Target(t), PrintingPolicy(LOpts), 735 Idents(idents), Selectors(sels), 736 BuiltinInfo(builtins), 737 DeclarationNames(*this), 738 ExternalSource(0), Listener(0), 739 Comments(SM), CommentsLoaded(false), 740 CommentCommandTraits(BumpAlloc, LOpts.CommentOpts), 741 LastSDM(0, 0) 742{ 743 if (size_reserve > 0) Types.reserve(size_reserve); 744 TUDecl = TranslationUnitDecl::Create(*this); 745 746 if (!DelayInitialization) { 747 assert(t && "No target supplied for ASTContext initialization"); 748 InitBuiltinTypes(*t); 749 } 750} 751 752ASTContext::~ASTContext() { 753 // Release the DenseMaps associated with DeclContext objects. 754 // FIXME: Is this the ideal solution? 755 ReleaseDeclContextMaps(); 756 757 // Call all of the deallocation functions on all of their targets. 758 for (DeallocationMap::const_iterator I = Deallocations.begin(), 759 E = Deallocations.end(); I != E; ++I) 760 for (unsigned J = 0, N = I->second.size(); J != N; ++J) 761 (I->first)((I->second)[J]); 762 763 // ASTRecordLayout objects in ASTRecordLayouts must always be destroyed 764 // because they can contain DenseMaps. 765 for (llvm::DenseMap<const ObjCContainerDecl*, 766 const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator 767 I = ObjCLayouts.begin(), E = ObjCLayouts.end(); I != E; ) 768 // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory. 769 if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second)) 770 R->Destroy(*this); 771 772 for (llvm::DenseMap<const RecordDecl*, const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator 773 I = ASTRecordLayouts.begin(), E = ASTRecordLayouts.end(); I != E; ) { 774 // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory. 775 if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second)) 776 R->Destroy(*this); 777 } 778 779 for (llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator A = DeclAttrs.begin(), 780 AEnd = DeclAttrs.end(); 781 A != AEnd; ++A) 782 A->second->~AttrVec(); 783 784 for (llvm::DenseMap<const DeclContext *, MangleNumberingContext *>::iterator 785 I = MangleNumberingContexts.begin(), 786 E = MangleNumberingContexts.end(); 787 I != E; ++I) 788 delete I->second; 789} 790 791void ASTContext::AddDeallocation(void (*Callback)(void*), void *Data) { 792 Deallocations[Callback].push_back(Data); 793} 794 795void 796ASTContext::setExternalSource(OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> &Source) { 797 ExternalSource.reset(Source.take()); 798} 799 800void ASTContext::PrintStats() const { 801 llvm::errs() << "\n*** AST Context Stats:\n"; 802 llvm::errs() << " " << Types.size() << " types total.\n"; 803 804 unsigned counts[] = { 805#define TYPE(Name, Parent) 0, 806#define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent) 807#include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" 808 0 // Extra 809 }; 810 811 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Types.size(); i != e; ++i) { 812 Type *T = Types[i]; 813 counts[(unsigned)T->getTypeClass()]++; 814 } 815 816 unsigned Idx = 0; 817 unsigned TotalBytes = 0; 818#define TYPE(Name, Parent) \ 819 if (counts[Idx]) \ 820 llvm::errs() << " " << counts[Idx] << " " << #Name \ 821 << " types\n"; \ 822 TotalBytes += counts[Idx] * sizeof(Name##Type); \ 823 ++Idx; 824#define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent) 825#include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" 826 827 llvm::errs() << "Total bytes = " << TotalBytes << "\n"; 828 829 // Implicit special member functions. 830 llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared << "/" 831 << NumImplicitDefaultConstructors 832 << " implicit default constructors created\n"; 833 llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared << "/" 834 << NumImplicitCopyConstructors 835 << " implicit copy constructors created\n"; 836 if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) 837 llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared << "/" 838 << NumImplicitMoveConstructors 839 << " implicit move constructors created\n"; 840 llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/" 841 << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators 842 << " implicit copy assignment operators created\n"; 843 if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) 844 llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/" 845 << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators 846 << " implicit move assignment operators created\n"; 847 llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared << "/" 848 << NumImplicitDestructors 849 << " implicit destructors created\n"; 850 851 if (ExternalSource.get()) { 852 llvm::errs() << "\n"; 853 ExternalSource->PrintStats(); 854 } 855 856 BumpAlloc.PrintStats(); 857} 858 859TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getInt128Decl() const { 860 if (!Int128Decl) { 861 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Int128Ty); 862 Int128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), 863 getTranslationUnitDecl(), 864 SourceLocation(), 865 SourceLocation(), 866 &Idents.get("__int128_t"), 867 TInfo); 868 } 869 870 return Int128Decl; 871} 872 873TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getUInt128Decl() const { 874 if (!UInt128Decl) { 875 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(UnsignedInt128Ty); 876 UInt128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), 877 getTranslationUnitDecl(), 878 SourceLocation(), 879 SourceLocation(), 880 &Idents.get("__uint128_t"), 881 TInfo); 882 } 883 884 return UInt128Decl; 885} 886 887TypeDecl *ASTContext::getFloat128StubType() const { 888 assert(LangOpts.CPlusPlus && "should only be called for c++"); 889 if (!Float128StubDecl) { 890 Float128StubDecl = CXXRecordDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), 891 TTK_Struct, 892 getTranslationUnitDecl(), 893 SourceLocation(), 894 SourceLocation(), 895 &Idents.get("__float128")); 896 } 897 898 return Float128StubDecl; 899} 900 901void ASTContext::InitBuiltinType(CanQualType &R, BuiltinType::Kind K) { 902 BuiltinType *Ty = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BuiltinType(K); 903 R = CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(QualType(Ty, 0)); 904 Types.push_back(Ty); 905} 906 907void ASTContext::InitBuiltinTypes(const TargetInfo &Target) { 908 assert((!this->Target || this->Target == &Target) && 909 "Incorrect target reinitialization"); 910 assert(VoidTy.isNull() && "Context reinitialized?"); 911 912 this->Target = &Target; 913 914 ABI.reset(createCXXABI(Target)); 915 AddrSpaceMap = getAddressSpaceMap(Target, LangOpts); 916 AddrSpaceMapMangling = isAddrSpaceMapManglingEnabled(Target, LangOpts); 917 918 // C99 6.2.5p19. 919 InitBuiltinType(VoidTy, BuiltinType::Void); 920 921 // C99 6.2.5p2. 922 InitBuiltinType(BoolTy, BuiltinType::Bool); 923 // C99 6.2.5p3. 924 if (LangOpts.CharIsSigned) 925 InitBuiltinType(CharTy, BuiltinType::Char_S); 926 else 927 InitBuiltinType(CharTy, BuiltinType::Char_U); 928 // C99 6.2.5p4. 929 InitBuiltinType(SignedCharTy, BuiltinType::SChar); 930 InitBuiltinType(ShortTy, BuiltinType::Short); 931 InitBuiltinType(IntTy, BuiltinType::Int); 932 InitBuiltinType(LongTy, BuiltinType::Long); 933 InitBuiltinType(LongLongTy, BuiltinType::LongLong); 934 935 // C99 6.2.5p6. 936 InitBuiltinType(UnsignedCharTy, BuiltinType::UChar); 937 InitBuiltinType(UnsignedShortTy, BuiltinType::UShort); 938 InitBuiltinType(UnsignedIntTy, BuiltinType::UInt); 939 InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongTy, BuiltinType::ULong); 940 InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongLongTy, BuiltinType::ULongLong); 941 942 // C99 6.2.5p10. 943 InitBuiltinType(FloatTy, BuiltinType::Float); 944 InitBuiltinType(DoubleTy, BuiltinType::Double); 945 InitBuiltinType(LongDoubleTy, BuiltinType::LongDouble); 946 947 // GNU extension, 128-bit integers. 948 InitBuiltinType(Int128Ty, BuiltinType::Int128); 949 InitBuiltinType(UnsignedInt128Ty, BuiltinType::UInt128); 950 951 // C++ 3.9.1p5 952 if (TargetInfo::isTypeSigned(Target.getWCharType())) 953 InitBuiltinType(WCharTy, BuiltinType::WChar_S); 954 else // -fshort-wchar makes wchar_t be unsigned. 955 InitBuiltinType(WCharTy, BuiltinType::WChar_U); 956 if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus && LangOpts.WChar) 957 WideCharTy = WCharTy; 958 else { 959 // C99 (or C++ using -fno-wchar). 960 WideCharTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType()); 961 } 962 963 WIntTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWIntType()); 964 965 if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++ 966 InitBuiltinType(Char16Ty, BuiltinType::Char16); 967 else // C99 968 Char16Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type()); 969 970 if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++ 971 InitBuiltinType(Char32Ty, BuiltinType::Char32); 972 else // C99 973 Char32Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type()); 974 975 // Placeholder type for type-dependent expressions whose type is 976 // completely unknown. No code should ever check a type against 977 // DependentTy and users should never see it; however, it is here to 978 // help diagnose failures to properly check for type-dependent 979 // expressions. 980 InitBuiltinType(DependentTy, BuiltinType::Dependent); 981 982 // Placeholder type for functions. 983 InitBuiltinType(OverloadTy, BuiltinType::Overload); 984 985 // Placeholder type for bound members. 986 InitBuiltinType(BoundMemberTy, BuiltinType::BoundMember); 987 988 // Placeholder type for pseudo-objects. 989 InitBuiltinType(PseudoObjectTy, BuiltinType::PseudoObject); 990 991 // "any" type; useful for debugger-like clients. 992 InitBuiltinType(UnknownAnyTy, BuiltinType::UnknownAny); 993 994 // Placeholder type for unbridged ARC casts. 995 InitBuiltinType(ARCUnbridgedCastTy, BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast); 996 997 // Placeholder type for builtin functions. 998 InitBuiltinType(BuiltinFnTy, BuiltinType::BuiltinFn); 999 1000 // C99 6.2.5p11. 1001 FloatComplexTy = getComplexType(FloatTy); 1002 DoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(DoubleTy); 1003 LongDoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(LongDoubleTy); 1004 1005 // Builtin types for 'id', 'Class', and 'SEL'. 1006 InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, BuiltinType::ObjCId); 1007 InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, BuiltinType::ObjCClass); 1008 InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy, BuiltinType::ObjCSel); 1009 1010 if (LangOpts.OpenCL) { 1011 InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1d); 1012 InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dArrayTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray); 1013 InitBuiltinType(OCLImage1dBufferTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer); 1014 InitBuiltinType(OCLImage2dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage2d); 1015 InitBuiltinType(OCLImage2dArrayTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray); 1016 InitBuiltinType(OCLImage3dTy, BuiltinType::OCLImage3d); 1017 1018 InitBuiltinType(OCLSamplerTy, BuiltinType::OCLSampler); 1019 InitBuiltinType(OCLEventTy, BuiltinType::OCLEvent); 1020 } 1021 1022 // Builtin type for __objc_yes and __objc_no 1023 ObjCBuiltinBoolTy = (Target.useSignedCharForObjCBool() ? 1024 SignedCharTy : BoolTy); 1025 1026 ObjCConstantStringType = QualType(); 1027 1028 ObjCSuperType = QualType(); 1029 1030 // void * type 1031 VoidPtrTy = getPointerType(VoidTy); 1032 1033 // nullptr type (C++0x 2.14.7) 1034 InitBuiltinType(NullPtrTy, BuiltinType::NullPtr); 1035 1036 // half type (OpenCL 6.1.1.1) / ARM NEON __fp16 1037 InitBuiltinType(HalfTy, BuiltinType::Half); 1038 1039 // Builtin type used to help define __builtin_va_list. 1040 VaListTagTy = QualType(); 1041} 1042 1043DiagnosticsEngine &ASTContext::getDiagnostics() const { 1044 return SourceMgr.getDiagnostics(); 1045} 1046 1047AttrVec& ASTContext::getDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) { 1048 AttrVec *&Result = DeclAttrs[D]; 1049 if (!Result) { 1050 void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(AttrVec)); 1051 Result = new (Mem) AttrVec; 1052 } 1053 1054 return *Result; 1055} 1056 1057/// \brief Erase the attributes corresponding to the given declaration. 1058void ASTContext::eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) { 1059 llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator Pos = DeclAttrs.find(D); 1060 if (Pos != DeclAttrs.end()) { 1061 Pos->second->~AttrVec(); 1062 DeclAttrs.erase(Pos); 1063 } 1064} 1065 1066// FIXME: Remove ? 1067MemberSpecializationInfo * 1068ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl *Var) { 1069 assert(Var->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member"); 1070 return getTemplateOrSpecializationInfo(Var) 1071 .dyn_cast<MemberSpecializationInfo *>(); 1072} 1073 1074ASTContext::TemplateOrSpecializationInfo 1075ASTContext::getTemplateOrSpecializationInfo(const VarDecl *Var) { 1076 llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl *, TemplateOrSpecializationInfo>::iterator Pos = 1077 TemplateOrInstantiation.find(Var); 1078 if (Pos == TemplateOrInstantiation.end()) 1079 return TemplateOrSpecializationInfo(); 1080 1081 return Pos->second; 1082} 1083 1084void 1085ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl *Inst, VarDecl *Tmpl, 1086 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK, 1087 SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation) { 1088 assert(Inst->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member"); 1089 assert(Tmpl->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member"); 1090 setTemplateOrSpecializationInfo(Inst, new (*this) MemberSpecializationInfo( 1091 Tmpl, TSK, PointOfInstantiation)); 1092} 1093 1094void 1095ASTContext::setTemplateOrSpecializationInfo(VarDecl *Inst, 1096 TemplateOrSpecializationInfo TSI) { 1097 assert(!TemplateOrInstantiation[Inst] && 1098 "Already noted what the variable was instantiated from"); 1099 TemplateOrInstantiation[Inst] = TSI; 1100} 1101 1102FunctionDecl *ASTContext::getClassScopeSpecializationPattern( 1103 const FunctionDecl *FD){ 1104 assert(FD && "Specialization is 0"); 1105 llvm::DenseMap<const FunctionDecl*, FunctionDecl *>::const_iterator Pos 1106 = ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.find(FD); 1107 if (Pos == ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.end()) 1108 return 0; 1109 1110 return Pos->second; 1111} 1112 1113void ASTContext::setClassScopeSpecializationPattern(FunctionDecl *FD, 1114 FunctionDecl *Pattern) { 1115 assert(FD && "Specialization is 0"); 1116 assert(Pattern && "Class scope specialization pattern is 0"); 1117 ClassScopeSpecializationPattern[FD] = Pattern; 1118} 1119 1120NamedDecl * 1121ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *UUD) { 1122 llvm::DenseMap<UsingDecl *, NamedDecl *>::const_iterator Pos 1123 = InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.find(UUD); 1124 if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.end()) 1125 return 0; 1126 1127 return Pos->second; 1128} 1129 1130void 1131ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *Inst, NamedDecl *Pattern) { 1132 assert((isa<UsingDecl>(Pattern) || 1133 isa<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(Pattern) || 1134 isa<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Pattern)) && 1135 "pattern decl is not a using decl"); 1136 assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists"); 1137 InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] = Pattern; 1138} 1139 1140UsingShadowDecl * 1141ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst) { 1142 llvm::DenseMap<UsingShadowDecl*, UsingShadowDecl*>::const_iterator Pos 1143 = InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.find(Inst); 1144 if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.end()) 1145 return 0; 1146 1147 return Pos->second; 1148} 1149 1150void 1151ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst, 1152 UsingShadowDecl *Pattern) { 1153 assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists"); 1154 InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] = Pattern; 1155} 1156 1157FieldDecl *ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Field) { 1158 llvm::DenseMap<FieldDecl *, FieldDecl *>::iterator Pos 1159 = InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.find(Field); 1160 if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.end()) 1161 return 0; 1162 1163 return Pos->second; 1164} 1165 1166void ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Inst, 1167 FieldDecl *Tmpl) { 1168 assert(!Inst->getDeclName() && "Instantiated field decl is not unnamed"); 1169 assert(!Tmpl->getDeclName() && "Template field decl is not unnamed"); 1170 assert(!InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] && 1171 "Already noted what unnamed field was instantiated from"); 1172 1173 InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] = Tmpl; 1174} 1175 1176ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator 1177ASTContext::overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const { 1178 llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos 1179 = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl()); 1180 if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end()) 1181 return 0; 1182 1183 return Pos->second.begin(); 1184} 1185 1186ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator 1187ASTContext::overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const { 1188 llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos 1189 = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl()); 1190 if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end()) 1191 return 0; 1192 1193 return Pos->second.end(); 1194} 1195 1196unsigned 1197ASTContext::overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const { 1198 llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos 1199 = OverriddenMethods.find(Method->getCanonicalDecl()); 1200 if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end()) 1201 return 0; 1202 1203 return Pos->second.size(); 1204} 1205 1206void ASTContext::addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl *Method, 1207 const CXXMethodDecl *Overridden) { 1208 assert(Method->isCanonicalDecl() && Overridden->isCanonicalDecl()); 1209 OverriddenMethods[Method].push_back(Overridden); 1210} 1211 1212void ASTContext::getOverriddenMethods( 1213 const NamedDecl *D, 1214 SmallVectorImpl<const NamedDecl *> &Overridden) const { 1215 assert(D); 1216 1217 if (const CXXMethodDecl *CXXMethod = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(D)) { 1218 Overridden.append(overridden_methods_begin(CXXMethod), 1219 overridden_methods_end(CXXMethod)); 1220 return; 1221 } 1222 1223 const ObjCMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<ObjCMethodDecl>(D); 1224 if (!Method) 1225 return; 1226 1227 SmallVector<const ObjCMethodDecl *, 8> OverDecls; 1228 Method->getOverriddenMethods(OverDecls); 1229 Overridden.append(OverDecls.begin(), OverDecls.end()); 1230} 1231 1232void ASTContext::addedLocalImportDecl(ImportDecl *Import) { 1233 assert(!Import->NextLocalImport && "Import declaration already in the chain"); 1234 assert(!Import->isFromASTFile() && "Non-local import declaration"); 1235 if (!FirstLocalImport) { 1236 FirstLocalImport = Import; 1237 LastLocalImport = Import; 1238 return; 1239 } 1240 1241 LastLocalImport->NextLocalImport = Import; 1242 LastLocalImport = Import; 1243} 1244 1245//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 1246// Type Sizing and Analysis 1247//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 1248 1249/// getFloatTypeSemantics - Return the APFloat 'semantics' for the specified 1250/// scalar floating point type. 1251const llvm::fltSemantics &ASTContext::getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const { 1252 const BuiltinType *BT = T->getAs<BuiltinType>(); 1253 assert(BT && "Not a floating point type!"); 1254 switch (BT->getKind()) { 1255 default: llvm_unreachable("Not a floating point type!"); 1256 case BuiltinType::Half: return Target->getHalfFormat(); 1257 case BuiltinType::Float: return Target->getFloatFormat(); 1258 case BuiltinType::Double: return Target->getDoubleFormat(); 1259 case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return Target->getLongDoubleFormat(); 1260 } 1261} 1262 1263CharUnits ASTContext::getDeclAlign(const Decl *D, bool ForAlignof) const { 1264 unsigned Align = Target->getCharWidth(); 1265 1266 bool UseAlignAttrOnly = false; 1267 if (unsigned AlignFromAttr = D->getMaxAlignment()) { 1268 Align = AlignFromAttr; 1269 1270 // __attribute__((aligned)) can increase or decrease alignment 1271 // *except* on a struct or struct member, where it only increases 1272 // alignment unless 'packed' is also specified. 1273 // 1274 // It is an error for alignas to decrease alignment, so we can 1275 // ignore that possibility; Sema should diagnose it. 1276 if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) { 1277 UseAlignAttrOnly = D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() || 1278 cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>(); 1279 } else { 1280 UseAlignAttrOnly = true; 1281 } 1282 } 1283 else if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) 1284 UseAlignAttrOnly = 1285 D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() || 1286 cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>(); 1287 1288 // If we're using the align attribute only, just ignore everything 1289 // else about the declaration and its type. 1290 if (UseAlignAttrOnly) { 1291 // do nothing 1292 1293 } else if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D)) { 1294 QualType T = VD->getType(); 1295 if (const ReferenceType* RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) { 1296 if (ForAlignof) 1297 T = RT->getPointeeType(); 1298 else 1299 T = getPointerType(RT->getPointeeType()); 1300 } 1301 if (!T->isIncompleteType() && !T->isFunctionType()) { 1302 // Adjust alignments of declarations with array type by the 1303 // large-array alignment on the target. 1304 if (const ArrayType *arrayType = getAsArrayType(T)) { 1305 unsigned MinWidth = Target->getLargeArrayMinWidth(); 1306 if (!ForAlignof && MinWidth) { 1307 if (isa<VariableArrayType>(arrayType)) 1308 Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign()); 1309 else if (isa<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType) && 1310 MinWidth <= getTypeSize(cast<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType))) 1311 Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign()); 1312 } 1313 1314 // Walk through any array types while we're at it. 1315 T = getBaseElementType(arrayType); 1316 } 1317 Align = std::max(Align, getPreferredTypeAlign(T.getTypePtr())); 1318 if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) { 1319 if (VD->hasGlobalStorage()) 1320 Align = std::max(Align, getTargetInfo().getMinGlobalAlign()); 1321 } 1322 } 1323 1324 // Fields can be subject to extra alignment constraints, like if 1325 // the field is packed, the struct is packed, or the struct has a 1326 // a max-field-alignment constraint (#pragma pack). So calculate 1327 // the actual alignment of the field within the struct, and then 1328 // (as we're expected to) constrain that by the alignment of the type. 1329 if (const FieldDecl *Field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(VD)) { 1330 const RecordDecl *Parent = Field->getParent(); 1331 // We can only produce a sensible answer if the record is valid. 1332 if (!Parent->isInvalidDecl()) { 1333 const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(Parent); 1334 1335 // Start with the record's overall alignment. 1336 unsigned FieldAlign = toBits(Layout.getAlignment()); 1337 1338 // Use the GCD of that and the offset within the record. 1339 uint64_t Offset = Layout.getFieldOffset(Field->getFieldIndex()); 1340 if (Offset > 0) { 1341 // Alignment is always a power of 2, so the GCD will be a power of 2, 1342 // which means we get to do this crazy thing instead of Euclid's. 1343 uint64_t LowBitOfOffset = Offset & (~Offset + 1); 1344 if (LowBitOfOffset < FieldAlign) 1345 FieldAlign = static_cast<unsigned>(LowBitOfOffset); 1346 } 1347 1348 Align = std::min(Align, FieldAlign); 1349 } 1350 } 1351 } 1352 1353 return toCharUnitsFromBits(Align); 1354} 1355 1356// getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars - Return the size of a type, in 1357// chars. If the type is a record, its data size is returned. This is 1358// the size of the memcpy that's performed when assigning this type 1359// using a trivial copy/move assignment operator. 1360std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> 1361ASTContext::getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars(QualType T) const { 1362 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> sizeAndAlign = getTypeInfoInChars(T); 1363 1364 // In C++, objects can sometimes be allocated into the tail padding 1365 // of a base-class subobject. We decide whether that's possible 1366 // during class layout, so here we can just trust the layout results. 1367 if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) { 1368 if (const RecordType *RT = T->getAs<RecordType>()) { 1369 const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl()); 1370 sizeAndAlign.first = layout.getDataSize(); 1371 } 1372 } 1373 1374 return sizeAndAlign; 1375} 1376 1377/// getConstantArrayInfoInChars - Performing the computation in CharUnits 1378/// instead of in bits prevents overflowing the uint64_t for some large arrays. 1379std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> 1380static getConstantArrayInfoInChars(const ASTContext &Context, 1381 const ConstantArrayType *CAT) { 1382 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> EltInfo = 1383 Context.getTypeInfoInChars(CAT->getElementType()); 1384 uint64_t Size = CAT->getSize().getZExtValue(); 1385 assert((Size == 0 || static_cast<uint64_t>(EltInfo.first.getQuantity()) <= 1386 (uint64_t)(-1)/Size) && 1387 "Overflow in array type char size evaluation"); 1388 uint64_t Width = EltInfo.first.getQuantity() * Size; 1389 unsigned Align = EltInfo.second.getQuantity(); 1390 if (!Context.getTargetInfo().getCXXABI().isMicrosoft() || 1391 Context.getTargetInfo().getPointerWidth(0) == 64) 1392 Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align); 1393 return std::make_pair(CharUnits::fromQuantity(Width), 1394 CharUnits::fromQuantity(Align)); 1395} 1396 1397std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> 1398ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(const Type *T) const { 1399 if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(T)) 1400 return getConstantArrayInfoInChars(*this, CAT); 1401 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfo(T); 1402 return std::make_pair(toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.first), 1403 toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.second)); 1404} 1405 1406std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> 1407ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) const { 1408 return getTypeInfoInChars(T.getTypePtr()); 1409} 1410 1411std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> ASTContext::getTypeInfo(const Type *T) const { 1412 TypeInfoMap::iterator it = MemoizedTypeInfo.find(T); 1413 if (it != MemoizedTypeInfo.end()) 1414 return it->second; 1415 1416 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfoImpl(T); 1417 MemoizedTypeInfo.insert(std::make_pair(T, Info)); 1418 return Info; 1419} 1420 1421/// getTypeInfoImpl - Return the size of the specified type, in bits. This 1422/// method does not work on incomplete types. 1423/// 1424/// FIXME: Pointers into different addr spaces could have different sizes and 1425/// alignment requirements: getPointerInfo should take an AddrSpace, this 1426/// should take a QualType, &c. 1427std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> 1428ASTContext::getTypeInfoImpl(const Type *T) const { 1429 uint64_t Width=0; 1430 unsigned Align=8; 1431 switch (T->getTypeClass()) { 1432#define TYPE(Class, Base) 1433#define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base) 1434#define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) 1435#define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: 1436#define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) \ 1437 case Type::Class: \ 1438 assert(!T->isDependentType() && "should not see dependent types here"); \ 1439 return getTypeInfo(cast<Class##Type>(T)->desugar().getTypePtr()); 1440#include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" 1441 llvm_unreachable("Should not see dependent types"); 1442 1443 case Type::FunctionNoProto: 1444 case Type::FunctionProto: 1445 // GCC extension: alignof(function) = 32 bits 1446 Width = 0; 1447 Align = 32; 1448 break; 1449 1450 case Type::IncompleteArray: 1451 case Type::VariableArray: 1452 Width = 0; 1453 Align = getTypeAlign(cast<ArrayType>(T)->getElementType()); 1454 break; 1455 1456 case Type::ConstantArray: { 1457 const ConstantArrayType *CAT = cast<ConstantArrayType>(T); 1458 1459 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(CAT->getElementType()); 1460 uint64_t Size = CAT->getSize().getZExtValue(); 1461 assert((Size == 0 || EltInfo.first <= (uint64_t)(-1)/Size) && 1462 "Overflow in array type bit size evaluation"); 1463 Width = EltInfo.first*Size; 1464 Align = EltInfo.second; 1465 if (!getTargetInfo().getCXXABI().isMicrosoft() || 1466 getTargetInfo().getPointerWidth(0) == 64) 1467 Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align); 1468 break; 1469 } 1470 case Type::ExtVector: 1471 case Type::Vector: { 1472 const VectorType *VT = cast<VectorType>(T); 1473 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(VT->getElementType()); 1474 Width = EltInfo.first*VT->getNumElements(); 1475 Align = Width; 1476 // If the alignment is not a power of 2, round up to the next power of 2. 1477 // This happens for non-power-of-2 length vectors. 1478 if (Align & (Align-1)) { 1479 Align = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Align); 1480 Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align); 1481 } 1482 // Adjust the alignment based on the target max. 1483 uint64_t TargetVectorAlign = Target->getMaxVectorAlign(); 1484 if (TargetVectorAlign && TargetVectorAlign < Align) 1485 Align = TargetVectorAlign; 1486 break; 1487 } 1488 1489 case Type::Builtin: 1490 switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) { 1491 default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type!"); 1492 case BuiltinType::Void: 1493 // GCC extension: alignof(void) = 8 bits. 1494 Width = 0; 1495 Align = 8; 1496 break; 1497 1498 case BuiltinType::Bool: 1499 Width = Target->getBoolWidth(); 1500 Align = Target->getBoolAlign(); 1501 break; 1502 case BuiltinType::Char_S: 1503 case BuiltinType::Char_U: 1504 case BuiltinType::UChar: 1505 case BuiltinType::SChar: 1506 Width = Target->getCharWidth(); 1507 Align = Target->getCharAlign(); 1508 break; 1509 case BuiltinType::WChar_S: 1510 case BuiltinType::WChar_U: 1511 Width = Target->getWCharWidth(); 1512 Align = Target->getWCharAlign(); 1513 break; 1514 case BuiltinType::Char16: 1515 Width = Target->getChar16Width(); 1516 Align = Target->getChar16Align(); 1517 break; 1518 case BuiltinType::Char32: 1519 Width = Target->getChar32Width(); 1520 Align = Target->getChar32Align(); 1521 break; 1522 case BuiltinType::UShort: 1523 case BuiltinType::Short: 1524 Width = Target->getShortWidth(); 1525 Align = Target->getShortAlign(); 1526 break; 1527 case BuiltinType::UInt: 1528 case BuiltinType::Int: 1529 Width = Target->getIntWidth(); 1530 Align = Target->getIntAlign(); 1531 break; 1532 case BuiltinType::ULong: 1533 case BuiltinType::Long: 1534 Width = Target->getLongWidth(); 1535 Align = Target->getLongAlign(); 1536 break; 1537 case BuiltinType::ULongLong: 1538 case BuiltinType::LongLong: 1539 Width = Target->getLongLongWidth(); 1540 Align = Target->getLongLongAlign(); 1541 break; 1542 case BuiltinType::Int128: 1543 case BuiltinType::UInt128: 1544 Width = 128; 1545 Align = 128; // int128_t is 128-bit aligned on all targets. 1546 break; 1547 case BuiltinType::Half: 1548 Width = Target->getHalfWidth(); 1549 Align = Target->getHalfAlign(); 1550 break; 1551 case BuiltinType::Float: 1552 Width = Target->getFloatWidth(); 1553 Align = Target->getFloatAlign(); 1554 break; 1555 case BuiltinType::Double: 1556 Width = Target->getDoubleWidth(); 1557 Align = Target->getDoubleAlign(); 1558 break; 1559 case BuiltinType::LongDouble: 1560 Width = Target->getLongDoubleWidth(); 1561 Align = Target->getLongDoubleAlign(); 1562 break; 1563 case BuiltinType::NullPtr: 1564 Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); // C++ 3.9.1p11: sizeof(nullptr_t) 1565 Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); // == sizeof(void*) 1566 break; 1567 case BuiltinType::ObjCId: 1568 case BuiltinType::ObjCClass: 1569 case BuiltinType::ObjCSel: 1570 Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); 1571 Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); 1572 break; 1573 case BuiltinType::OCLSampler: 1574 // Samplers are modeled as integers. 1575 Width = Target->getIntWidth(); 1576 Align = Target->getIntAlign(); 1577 break; 1578 case BuiltinType::OCLEvent: 1579 case BuiltinType::OCLImage1d: 1580 case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray: 1581 case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer: 1582 case BuiltinType::OCLImage2d: 1583 case BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray: 1584 case BuiltinType::OCLImage3d: 1585 // Currently these types are pointers to opaque types. 1586 Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); 1587 Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); 1588 break; 1589 } 1590 break; 1591 case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: 1592 Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); 1593 Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); 1594 break; 1595 case Type::BlockPointer: { 1596 unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace( 1597 cast<BlockPointerType>(T)->getPointeeType()); 1598 Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS); 1599 Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS); 1600 break; 1601 } 1602 case Type::LValueReference: 1603 case Type::RValueReference: { 1604 // alignof and sizeof should never enter this code path here, so we go 1605 // the pointer route. 1606 unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace( 1607 cast<ReferenceType>(T)->getPointeeType()); 1608 Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS); 1609 Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS); 1610 break; 1611 } 1612 case Type::Pointer: { 1613 unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(cast<PointerType>(T)->getPointeeType()); 1614 Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS); 1615 Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS); 1616 break; 1617 } 1618 case Type::MemberPointer: { 1619 const MemberPointerType *MPT = cast<MemberPointerType>(T); 1620 llvm::tie(Width, Align) = ABI->getMemberPointerWidthAndAlign(MPT); 1621 break; 1622 } 1623 case Type::Complex: { 1624 // Complex types have the same alignment as their elements, but twice the 1625 // size. 1626 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = 1627 getTypeInfo(cast<ComplexType>(T)->getElementType()); 1628 Width = EltInfo.first*2; 1629 Align = EltInfo.second; 1630 break; 1631 } 1632 case Type::ObjCObject: 1633 return getTypeInfo(cast<ObjCObjectType>(T)->getBaseType().getTypePtr()); 1634 case Type::Decayed: 1635 return getTypeInfo(cast<DecayedType>(T)->getDecayedType().getTypePtr()); 1636 case Type::ObjCInterface: { 1637 const ObjCInterfaceType *ObjCI = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(T); 1638 const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(ObjCI->getDecl()); 1639 Width = toBits(Layout.getSize()); 1640 Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment()); 1641 break; 1642 } 1643 case Type::Record: 1644 case Type::Enum: { 1645 const TagType *TT = cast<TagType>(T); 1646 1647 if (TT->getDecl()->isInvalidDecl()) { 1648 Width = 8; 1649 Align = 8; 1650 break; 1651 } 1652 1653 if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(TT)) 1654 return getTypeInfo(ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType()); 1655 1656 const RecordType *RT = cast<RecordType>(TT); 1657 const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl()); 1658 Width = toBits(Layout.getSize()); 1659 Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment()); 1660 break; 1661 } 1662 1663 case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParm: 1664 return getTypeInfo(cast<SubstTemplateTypeParmType>(T)-> 1665 getReplacementType().getTypePtr()); 1666 1667 case Type::Auto: { 1668 const AutoType *A = cast<AutoType>(T); 1669 assert(!A->getDeducedType().isNull() && 1670 "cannot request the size of an undeduced or dependent auto type"); 1671 return getTypeInfo(A->getDeducedType().getTypePtr()); 1672 } 1673 1674 case Type::Paren: 1675 return getTypeInfo(cast<ParenType>(T)->getInnerType().getTypePtr()); 1676 1677 case Type::Typedef: { 1678 const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = cast<TypedefType>(T)->getDecl(); 1679 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info 1680 = getTypeInfo(Typedef->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr()); 1681 // If the typedef has an aligned attribute on it, it overrides any computed 1682 // alignment we have. This violates the GCC documentation (which says that 1683 // attribute(aligned) can only round up) but matches its implementation. 1684 if (unsigned AttrAlign = Typedef->getMaxAlignment()) 1685 Align = AttrAlign; 1686 else 1687 Align = Info.second; 1688 Width = Info.first; 1689 break; 1690 } 1691 1692 case Type::Elaborated: 1693 return getTypeInfo(cast<ElaboratedType>(T)->getNamedType().getTypePtr()); 1694 1695 case Type::Attributed: 1696 return getTypeInfo( 1697 cast<AttributedType>(T)->getEquivalentType().getTypePtr()); 1698 1699 case Type::Atomic: { 1700 // Start with the base type information. 1701 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info 1702 = getTypeInfo(cast<AtomicType>(T)->getValueType()); 1703 Width = Info.first; 1704 Align = Info.second; 1705 1706 // If the size of the type doesn't exceed the platform's max 1707 // atomic promotion width, make the size and alignment more 1708 // favorable to atomic operations: 1709 if (Width != 0 && Width <= Target->getMaxAtomicPromoteWidth()) { 1710 // Round the size up to a power of 2. 1711 if (!llvm::isPowerOf2_64(Width)) 1712 Width = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Width); 1713 1714 // Set the alignment equal to the size. 1715 Align = static_cast<unsigned>(Width); 1716 } 1717 } 1718 1719 } 1720 1721 assert(llvm::isPowerOf2_32(Align) && "Alignment must be power of 2"); 1722 return std::make_pair(Width, Align); 1723} 1724 1725/// toCharUnitsFromBits - Convert a size in bits to a size in characters. 1726CharUnits ASTContext::toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const { 1727 return CharUnits::fromQuantity(BitSize / getCharWidth()); 1728} 1729 1730/// toBits - Convert a size in characters to a size in characters. 1731int64_t ASTContext::toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const { 1732 return CharSize.getQuantity() * getCharWidth(); 1733} 1734 1735/// getTypeSizeInChars - Return the size of the specified type, in characters. 1736/// This method does not work on incomplete types. 1737CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const { 1738 return getTypeInfoInChars(T).first; 1739} 1740CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(const Type *T) const { 1741 return getTypeInfoInChars(T).first; 1742} 1743 1744/// getTypeAlignInChars - Return the ABI-specified alignment of a type, in 1745/// characters. This method does not work on incomplete types. 1746CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const { 1747 return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T)); 1748} 1749CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(const Type *T) const { 1750 return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T)); 1751} 1752 1753/// getPreferredTypeAlign - Return the "preferred" alignment of the specified 1754/// type for the current target in bits. This can be different than the ABI 1755/// alignment in cases where it is beneficial for performance to overalign 1756/// a data type. 1757unsigned ASTContext::getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type *T) const { 1758 unsigned ABIAlign = getTypeAlign(T); 1759 1760 // Double and long long should be naturally aligned if possible. 1761 if (const ComplexType* CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) 1762 T = CT->getElementType().getTypePtr(); 1763 if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Double) || 1764 T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::LongLong) || 1765 T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ULongLong)) 1766 return std::max(ABIAlign, (unsigned)getTypeSize(T)); 1767 1768 return ABIAlign; 1769} 1770 1771/// getAlignOfGlobalVar - Return the alignment in bits that should be given 1772/// to a global variable of the specified type. 1773unsigned ASTContext::getAlignOfGlobalVar(QualType T) const { 1774 return std::max(getTypeAlign(T), getTargetInfo().getMinGlobalAlign()); 1775} 1776 1777/// getAlignOfGlobalVarInChars - Return the alignment in characters that 1778/// should be given to a global variable of the specified type. 1779CharUnits ASTContext::getAlignOfGlobalVarInChars(QualType T) const { 1780 return toCharUnitsFromBits(getAlignOfGlobalVar(T)); 1781} 1782 1783/// DeepCollectObjCIvars - 1784/// This routine first collects all declared, but not synthesized, ivars in 1785/// super class and then collects all ivars, including those synthesized for 1786/// current class. This routine is used for implementation of current class 1787/// when all ivars, declared and synthesized are known. 1788/// 1789void ASTContext::DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI, 1790 bool leafClass, 1791 SmallVectorImpl<const ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const { 1792 if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *SuperClass = OI->getSuperClass()) 1793 DeepCollectObjCIvars(SuperClass, false, Ivars); 1794 if (!leafClass) { 1795 for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::ivar_iterator I = OI->ivar_begin(), 1796 E = OI->ivar_end(); I != E; ++I) 1797 Ivars.push_back(*I); 1798 } else { 1799 ObjCInterfaceDecl *IDecl = const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl *>(OI); 1800 for (const ObjCIvarDecl *Iv = IDecl->all_declared_ivar_begin(); Iv; 1801 Iv= Iv->getNextIvar()) 1802 Ivars.push_back(Iv); 1803 } 1804} 1805 1806/// CollectInheritedProtocols - Collect all protocols in current class and 1807/// those inherited by it. 1808void ASTContext::CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl *CDecl, 1809 llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> &Protocols) { 1810 if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(CDecl)) { 1811 // We can use protocol_iterator here instead of 1812 // all_referenced_protocol_iterator since we are walking all categories. 1813 for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::all_protocol_iterator P = OI->all_referenced_protocol_begin(), 1814 PE = OI->all_referenced_protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { 1815 ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P); 1816 Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl()); 1817 for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(), 1818 PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { 1819 Protocols.insert((*P)->getCanonicalDecl()); 1820 CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols); 1821 } 1822 } 1823 1824 // Categories of this Interface. 1825 for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::visible_categories_iterator 1826 Cat = OI->visible_categories_begin(), 1827 CatEnd = OI->visible_categories_end(); 1828 Cat != CatEnd; ++Cat) { 1829 CollectInheritedProtocols(*Cat, Protocols); 1830 } 1831 1832 if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *SD = OI->getSuperClass()) 1833 while (SD) { 1834 CollectInheritedProtocols(SD, Protocols); 1835 SD = SD->getSuperClass(); 1836 } 1837 } else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *OC = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(CDecl)) { 1838 for (ObjCCategoryDecl::protocol_iterator P = OC->protocol_begin(), 1839 PE = OC->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { 1840 ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P); 1841 Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl()); 1842 for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(), 1843 PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) 1844 CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols); 1845 } 1846 } else if (const ObjCProtocolDecl *OP = dyn_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl>(CDecl)) { 1847 for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = OP->protocol_begin(), 1848 PE = OP->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { 1849 ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P); 1850 Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl()); 1851 for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(), 1852 PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) 1853 CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols); 1854 } 1855 } 1856} 1857 1858unsigned ASTContext::CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI) const { 1859 unsigned count = 0; 1860 // Count ivars declared in class extension. 1861 for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::known_extensions_iterator 1862 Ext = OI->known_extensions_begin(), 1863 ExtEnd = OI->known_extensions_end(); 1864 Ext != ExtEnd; ++Ext) { 1865 count += Ext->ivar_size(); 1866 } 1867 1868 // Count ivar defined in this class's implementation. This 1869 // includes synthesized ivars. 1870 if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplDecl = OI->getImplementation()) 1871 count += ImplDecl->ivar_size(); 1872 1873 return count; 1874} 1875 1876bool ASTContext::isSentinelNullExpr(const Expr *E) { 1877 if (!E) 1878 return false; 1879 1880 // nullptr_t is always treated as null. 1881 if (E->getType()->isNullPtrType()) return true; 1882 1883 if (E->getType()->isAnyPointerType() && 1884 E->IgnoreParenCasts()->isNullPointerConstant(*this, 1885 Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull)) 1886 return true; 1887 1888 // Unfortunately, __null has type 'int'. 1889 if (isa<GNUNullExpr>(E)) return true; 1890 1891 return false; 1892} 1893 1894/// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl,or NULL if none exists. 1895ObjCImplementationDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) { 1896 llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator 1897 I = ObjCImpls.find(D); 1898 if (I != ObjCImpls.end()) 1899 return cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(I->second); 1900 return 0; 1901} 1902/// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl, or NULL if none exists. 1903ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *D) { 1904 llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator 1905 I = ObjCImpls.find(D); 1906 if (I != ObjCImpls.end()) 1907 return cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(I->second); 1908 return 0; 1909} 1910 1911/// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl. 1912void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFaceD, 1913 ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplD) { 1914 assert(IFaceD && ImplD && "Passed null params"); 1915 ObjCImpls[IFaceD] = ImplD; 1916} 1917/// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl. 1918void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *CatD, 1919 ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ImplD) { 1920 assert(CatD && ImplD && "Passed null params"); 1921 ObjCImpls[CatD] = ImplD; 1922} 1923 1924const ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjContainingInterface( 1925 const NamedDecl *ND) const { 1926 if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = 1927 dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(ND->getDeclContext())) 1928 return ID; 1929 if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CD = 1930 dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(ND->getDeclContext())) 1931 return CD->getClassInterface(); 1932 if (const ObjCImplDecl *IMD = 1933 dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(ND->getDeclContext())) 1934 return IMD->getClassInterface(); 1935 1936 return 0; 1937} 1938 1939/// \brief Get the copy initialization expression of VarDecl,or NULL if 1940/// none exists. 1941Expr *ASTContext::getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl*VD) { 1942 assert(VD && "Passed null params"); 1943 assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() && 1944 "getBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var"); 1945 llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl*, Expr*>::iterator 1946 I = BlockVarCopyInits.find(VD); 1947 return (I != BlockVarCopyInits.end()) ? cast<Expr>(I->second) : 0; 1948} 1949 1950/// \brief Set the copy inialization expression of a block var decl. 1951void ASTContext::setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl*VD, Expr* Init) { 1952 assert(VD && Init && "Passed null params"); 1953 assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() && 1954 "setBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var"); 1955 BlockVarCopyInits[VD] = Init; 1956} 1957 1958TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T, 1959 unsigned DataSize) const { 1960 if (!DataSize) 1961 DataSize = TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T); 1962 else 1963 assert(DataSize == TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T) && 1964 "incorrect data size provided to CreateTypeSourceInfo!"); 1965 1966 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = 1967 (TypeSourceInfo*)BumpAlloc.Allocate(sizeof(TypeSourceInfo) + DataSize, 8); 1968 new (TInfo) TypeSourceInfo(T); 1969 return TInfo; 1970} 1971 1972TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T, 1973 SourceLocation L) const { 1974 TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(T); 1975 DI->getTypeLoc().initialize(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), L); 1976 return DI; 1977} 1978 1979const ASTRecordLayout & 1980ASTContext::getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) const { 1981 return getObjCLayout(D, 0); 1982} 1983 1984const ASTRecordLayout & 1985ASTContext::getASTObjCImplementationLayout( 1986 const ObjCImplementationDecl *D) const { 1987 return getObjCLayout(D->getClassInterface(), D); 1988} 1989 1990//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 1991// Type creation/memoization methods 1992//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 1993 1994QualType 1995ASTContext::getExtQualType(const Type *baseType, Qualifiers quals) const { 1996 unsigned fastQuals = quals.getFastQualifiers(); 1997 quals.removeFastQualifiers(); 1998 1999 // Check if we've already instantiated this type. 2000 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2001 ExtQuals::Profile(ID, baseType, quals); 2002 void *insertPos = 0; 2003 if (ExtQuals *eq = ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) { 2004 assert(eq->getQualifiers() == quals); 2005 return QualType(eq, fastQuals); 2006 } 2007 2008 // If the base type is not canonical, make the appropriate canonical type. 2009 QualType canon; 2010 if (!baseType->isCanonicalUnqualified()) { 2011 SplitQualType canonSplit = baseType->getCanonicalTypeInternal().split(); 2012 canonSplit.Quals.addConsistentQualifiers(quals); 2013 canon = getExtQualType(canonSplit.Ty, canonSplit.Quals); 2014 2015 // Re-find the insert position. 2016 (void) ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos); 2017 } 2018 2019 ExtQuals *eq = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ExtQuals(baseType, canon, quals); 2020 ExtQualNodes.InsertNode(eq, insertPos); 2021 return QualType(eq, fastQuals); 2022} 2023 2024QualType 2025ASTContext::getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T, unsigned AddressSpace) const { 2026 QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T); 2027 if (CanT.getAddressSpace() == AddressSpace) 2028 return T; 2029 2030 // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together 2031 // into one ExtQuals node. 2032 QualifierCollector Quals; 2033 const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T); 2034 2035 // If this type already has an address space specified, it cannot get 2036 // another one. 2037 assert(!Quals.hasAddressSpace() && 2038 "Type cannot be in multiple addr spaces!"); 2039 Quals.addAddressSpace(AddressSpace); 2040 2041 return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals); 2042} 2043 2044QualType ASTContext::getObjCGCQualType(QualType T, 2045 Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const { 2046 QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T); 2047 if (CanT.getObjCGCAttr() == GCAttr) 2048 return T; 2049 2050 if (const PointerType *ptr = T->getAs<PointerType>()) { 2051 QualType Pointee = ptr->getPointeeType(); 2052 if (Pointee->isAnyPointerType()) { 2053 QualType ResultType = getObjCGCQualType(Pointee, GCAttr); 2054 return getPointerType(ResultType); 2055 } 2056 } 2057 2058 // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together 2059 // into one ExtQuals node. 2060 QualifierCollector Quals; 2061 const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T); 2062 2063 // If this type already has an ObjCGC specified, it cannot get 2064 // another one. 2065 assert(!Quals.hasObjCGCAttr() && 2066 "Type cannot have multiple ObjCGCs!"); 2067 Quals.addObjCGCAttr(GCAttr); 2068 2069 return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals); 2070} 2071 2072const FunctionType *ASTContext::adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType *T, 2073 FunctionType::ExtInfo Info) { 2074 if (T->getExtInfo() == Info) 2075 return T; 2076 2077 QualType Result; 2078 if (const FunctionNoProtoType *FNPT = dyn_cast<FunctionNoProtoType>(T)) { 2079 Result = getFunctionNoProtoType(FNPT->getResultType(), Info); 2080 } else { 2081 const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(T); 2082 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo(); 2083 EPI.ExtInfo = Info; 2084 Result = getFunctionType(FPT->getResultType(), FPT->getArgTypes(), EPI); 2085 } 2086 2087 return cast<FunctionType>(Result.getTypePtr()); 2088} 2089 2090void ASTContext::adjustDeducedFunctionResultType(FunctionDecl *FD, 2091 QualType ResultType) { 2092 FD = FD->getMostRecentDecl(); 2093 while (true) { 2094 const FunctionProtoType *FPT = FD->getType()->castAs<FunctionProtoType>(); 2095 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo(); 2096 FD->setType(getFunctionType(ResultType, FPT->getArgTypes(), EPI)); 2097 if (FunctionDecl *Next = FD->getPreviousDecl()) 2098 FD = Next; 2099 else 2100 break; 2101 } 2102 if (ASTMutationListener *L = getASTMutationListener()) 2103 L->DeducedReturnType(FD, ResultType); 2104} 2105 2106/// getComplexType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a complex 2107/// number with the specified element type. 2108QualType ASTContext::getComplexType(QualType T) const { 2109 // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular 2110 // structure. 2111 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2112 ComplexType::Profile(ID, T); 2113 2114 void *InsertPos = 0; 2115 if (ComplexType *CT = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2116 return QualType(CT, 0); 2117 2118 // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, 2119 // so fill in the canonical type field. 2120 QualType Canonical; 2121 if (!T.isCanonical()) { 2122 Canonical = getComplexType(getCanonicalType(T)); 2123 2124 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2125 ComplexType *NewIP = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2126 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2127 } 2128 ComplexType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ComplexType(T, Canonical); 2129 Types.push_back(New); 2130 ComplexTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2131 return QualType(New, 0); 2132} 2133 2134/// getPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a pointer to 2135/// the specified type. 2136QualType ASTContext::getPointerType(QualType T) const { 2137 // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular 2138 // structure. 2139 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2140 PointerType::Profile(ID, T); 2141 2142 void *InsertPos = 0; 2143 if (PointerType *PT = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2144 return QualType(PT, 0); 2145 2146 // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, 2147 // so fill in the canonical type field. 2148 QualType Canonical; 2149 if (!T.isCanonical()) { 2150 Canonical = getPointerType(getCanonicalType(T)); 2151 2152 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2153 PointerType *NewIP = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2154 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2155 } 2156 PointerType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) PointerType(T, Canonical); 2157 Types.push_back(New); 2158 PointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2159 return QualType(New, 0); 2160} 2161 2162QualType ASTContext::getDecayedType(QualType T) const { 2163 assert((T->isArrayType() || T->isFunctionType()) && "T does not decay"); 2164 2165 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2166 DecayedType::Profile(ID, T); 2167 void *InsertPos = 0; 2168 if (DecayedType *DT = DecayedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2169 return QualType(DT, 0); 2170 2171 QualType Decayed; 2172 2173 // C99 6.7.5.3p7: 2174 // A declaration of a parameter as "array of type" shall be 2175 // adjusted to "qualified pointer to type", where the type 2176 // qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of 2177 // the array type derivation. 2178 if (T->isArrayType()) 2179 Decayed = getArrayDecayedType(T); 2180 2181 // C99 6.7.5.3p8: 2182 // A declaration of a parameter as "function returning type" 2183 // shall be adjusted to "pointer to function returning type", as 2184 // in 6.3.2.1. 2185 if (T->isFunctionType()) 2186 Decayed = getPointerType(T); 2187 2188 QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decayed); 2189 2190 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2191 DecayedType *NewIP = DecayedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2192 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2193 2194 DecayedType *New = 2195 new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecayedType(T, Decayed, Canonical); 2196 Types.push_back(New); 2197 DecayedTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2198 return QualType(New, 0); 2199} 2200 2201/// getBlockPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for 2202/// a pointer to the specified block. 2203QualType ASTContext::getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const { 2204 assert(T->isFunctionType() && "block of function types only"); 2205 // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one block of a particular 2206 // structure. 2207 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2208 BlockPointerType::Profile(ID, T); 2209 2210 void *InsertPos = 0; 2211 if (BlockPointerType *PT = 2212 BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2213 return QualType(PT, 0); 2214 2215 // If the block pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical 2216 // type either so fill in the canonical type field. 2217 QualType Canonical; 2218 if (!T.isCanonical()) { 2219 Canonical = getBlockPointerType(getCanonicalType(T)); 2220 2221 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2222 BlockPointerType *NewIP = 2223 BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2224 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2225 } 2226 BlockPointerType *New 2227 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BlockPointerType(T, Canonical); 2228 Types.push_back(New); 2229 BlockPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2230 return QualType(New, 0); 2231} 2232 2233/// getLValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an 2234/// lvalue reference to the specified type. 2235QualType 2236ASTContext::getLValueReferenceType(QualType T, bool SpelledAsLValue) const { 2237 assert(getCanonicalType(T) != OverloadTy && 2238 "Unresolved overloaded function type"); 2239 2240 // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular 2241 // structure. 2242 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2243 ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, SpelledAsLValue); 2244 2245 void *InsertPos = 0; 2246 if (LValueReferenceType *RT = 2247 LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2248 return QualType(RT, 0); 2249 2250 const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>(); 2251 2252 // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type 2253 // either, so fill in the canonical type field. 2254 QualType Canonical; 2255 if (!SpelledAsLValue || InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) { 2256 QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T); 2257 Canonical = getLValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType)); 2258 2259 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2260 LValueReferenceType *NewIP = 2261 LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2262 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2263 } 2264 2265 LValueReferenceType *New 2266 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) LValueReferenceType(T, Canonical, 2267 SpelledAsLValue); 2268 Types.push_back(New); 2269 LValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2270 2271 return QualType(New, 0); 2272} 2273 2274/// getRValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an 2275/// rvalue reference to the specified type. 2276QualType ASTContext::getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const { 2277 // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular 2278 // structure. 2279 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2280 ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, false); 2281 2282 void *InsertPos = 0; 2283 if (RValueReferenceType *RT = 2284 RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2285 return QualType(RT, 0); 2286 2287 const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>(); 2288 2289 // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type 2290 // either, so fill in the canonical type field. 2291 QualType Canonical; 2292 if (InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) { 2293 QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T); 2294 Canonical = getRValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType)); 2295 2296 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2297 RValueReferenceType *NewIP = 2298 RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2299 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2300 } 2301 2302 RValueReferenceType *New 2303 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RValueReferenceType(T, Canonical); 2304 Types.push_back(New); 2305 RValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2306 return QualType(New, 0); 2307} 2308 2309/// getMemberPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a 2310/// member pointer to the specified type, in the specified class. 2311QualType ASTContext::getMemberPointerType(QualType T, const Type *Cls) const { 2312 // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular 2313 // structure. 2314 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2315 MemberPointerType::Profile(ID, T, Cls); 2316 2317 void *InsertPos = 0; 2318 if (MemberPointerType *PT = 2319 MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2320 return QualType(PT, 0); 2321 2322 // If the pointee or class type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical 2323 // type either, so fill in the canonical type field. 2324 QualType Canonical; 2325 if (!T.isCanonical() || !Cls->isCanonicalUnqualified()) { 2326 Canonical = getMemberPointerType(getCanonicalType(T),getCanonicalType(Cls)); 2327 2328 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2329 MemberPointerType *NewIP = 2330 MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2331 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2332 } 2333 MemberPointerType *New 2334 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) MemberPointerType(T, Cls, Canonical); 2335 Types.push_back(New); 2336 MemberPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2337 return QualType(New, 0); 2338} 2339 2340/// getConstantArrayType - Return the unique reference to the type for an 2341/// array of the specified element type. 2342QualType ASTContext::getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy, 2343 const llvm::APInt &ArySizeIn, 2344 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, 2345 unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const { 2346 assert((EltTy->isDependentType() || 2347 EltTy->isIncompleteType() || EltTy->isConstantSizeType()) && 2348 "Constant array of VLAs is illegal!"); 2349 2350 // Convert the array size into a canonical width matching the pointer size for 2351 // the target. 2352 llvm::APInt ArySize(ArySizeIn); 2353 ArySize = 2354 ArySize.zextOrTrunc(Target->getPointerWidth(getTargetAddressSpace(EltTy))); 2355 2356 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2357 ConstantArrayType::Profile(ID, EltTy, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals); 2358 2359 void *InsertPos = 0; 2360 if (ConstantArrayType *ATP = 2361 ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2362 return QualType(ATP, 0); 2363 2364 // If the element type isn't canonical or has qualifiers, this won't 2365 // be a canonical type either, so fill in the canonical type field. 2366 QualType Canon; 2367 if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) { 2368 SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split(); 2369 Canon = getConstantArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), ArySize, 2370 ASM, IndexTypeQuals); 2371 Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals); 2372 2373 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2374 ConstantArrayType *NewIP = 2375 ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2376 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2377 } 2378 2379 ConstantArrayType *New = new(*this,TypeAlignment) 2380 ConstantArrayType(EltTy, Canon, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals); 2381 ConstantArrayTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2382 Types.push_back(New); 2383 return QualType(New, 0); 2384} 2385 2386/// getVariableArrayDecayedType - Turns the given type, which may be 2387/// variably-modified, into the corresponding type with all the known 2388/// sizes replaced with [*]. 2389QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const { 2390 // Vastly most common case. 2391 if (!type->isVariablyModifiedType()) return type; 2392 2393 QualType result; 2394 2395 SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType(); 2396 const Type *ty = split.Ty; 2397 switch (ty->getTypeClass()) { 2398#define TYPE(Class, Base) 2399#define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base) 2400#define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: 2401#include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" 2402 llvm_unreachable("didn't desugar past all non-canonical types?"); 2403 2404 // These types should never be variably-modified. 2405 case Type::Builtin: 2406 case Type::Complex: 2407 case Type::Vector: 2408 case Type::ExtVector: 2409 case Type::DependentSizedExtVector: 2410 case Type::ObjCObject: 2411 case Type::ObjCInterface: 2412 case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: 2413 case Type::Record: 2414 case Type::Enum: 2415 case Type::UnresolvedUsing: 2416 case Type::TypeOfExpr: 2417 case Type::TypeOf: 2418 case Type::Decltype: 2419 case Type::UnaryTransform: 2420 case Type::DependentName: 2421 case Type::InjectedClassName: 2422 case Type::TemplateSpecialization: 2423 case Type::DependentTemplateSpecialization: 2424 case Type::TemplateTypeParm: 2425 case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParmPack: 2426 case Type::Auto: 2427 case Type::PackExpansion: 2428 llvm_unreachable("type should never be variably-modified"); 2429 2430 // These types can be variably-modified but should never need to 2431 // further decay. 2432 case Type::FunctionNoProto: 2433 case Type::FunctionProto: 2434 case Type::BlockPointer: 2435 case Type::MemberPointer: 2436 return type; 2437 2438 // These types can be variably-modified. All these modifications 2439 // preserve structure except as noted by comments. 2440 // TODO: if we ever care about optimizing VLAs, there are no-op 2441 // optimizations available here. 2442 case Type::Pointer: 2443 result = getPointerType(getVariableArrayDecayedType( 2444 cast<PointerType>(ty)->getPointeeType())); 2445 break; 2446 2447 case Type::LValueReference: { 2448 const LValueReferenceType *lv = cast<LValueReferenceType>(ty); 2449 result = getLValueReferenceType( 2450 getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()), 2451 lv->isSpelledAsLValue()); 2452 break; 2453 } 2454 2455 case Type::RValueReference: { 2456 const RValueReferenceType *lv = cast<RValueReferenceType>(ty); 2457 result = getRValueReferenceType( 2458 getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType())); 2459 break; 2460 } 2461 2462 case Type::Atomic: { 2463 const AtomicType *at = cast<AtomicType>(ty); 2464 result = getAtomicType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(at->getValueType())); 2465 break; 2466 } 2467 2468 case Type::ConstantArray: { 2469 const ConstantArrayType *cat = cast<ConstantArrayType>(ty); 2470 result = getConstantArrayType( 2471 getVariableArrayDecayedType(cat->getElementType()), 2472 cat->getSize(), 2473 cat->getSizeModifier(), 2474 cat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()); 2475 break; 2476 } 2477 2478 case Type::DependentSizedArray: { 2479 const DependentSizedArrayType *dat = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ty); 2480 result = getDependentSizedArrayType( 2481 getVariableArrayDecayedType(dat->getElementType()), 2482 dat->getSizeExpr(), 2483 dat->getSizeModifier(), 2484 dat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), 2485 dat->getBracketsRange()); 2486 break; 2487 } 2488 2489 // Turn incomplete types into [*] types. 2490 case Type::IncompleteArray: { 2491 const IncompleteArrayType *iat = cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ty); 2492 result = getVariableArrayType( 2493 getVariableArrayDecayedType(iat->getElementType()), 2494 /*size*/ 0, 2495 ArrayType::Normal, 2496 iat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), 2497 SourceRange()); 2498 break; 2499 } 2500 2501 // Turn VLA types into [*] types. 2502 case Type::VariableArray: { 2503 const VariableArrayType *vat = cast<VariableArrayType>(ty); 2504 result = getVariableArrayType( 2505 getVariableArrayDecayedType(vat->getElementType()), 2506 /*size*/ 0, 2507 ArrayType::Star, 2508 vat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), 2509 vat->getBracketsRange()); 2510 break; 2511 } 2512 } 2513 2514 // Apply the top-level qualifiers from the original. 2515 return getQualifiedType(result, split.Quals); 2516} 2517 2518/// getVariableArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to the type for a 2519/// variable array of the specified element type. 2520QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy, 2521 Expr *NumElts, 2522 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, 2523 unsigned IndexTypeQuals, 2524 SourceRange Brackets) const { 2525 // Since we don't unique expressions, it isn't possible to unique VLA's 2526 // that have an expression provided for their size. 2527 QualType Canon; 2528 2529 // Be sure to pull qualifiers off the element type. 2530 if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) { 2531 SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split(); 2532 Canon = getVariableArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), NumElts, ASM, 2533 IndexTypeQuals, Brackets); 2534 Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals); 2535 } 2536 2537 VariableArrayType *New = new(*this, TypeAlignment) 2538 VariableArrayType(EltTy, Canon, NumElts, ASM, IndexTypeQuals, Brackets); 2539 2540 VariableArrayTypes.push_back(New); 2541 Types.push_back(New); 2542 return QualType(New, 0); 2543} 2544 2545/// getDependentSizedArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to 2546/// the type for a dependently-sized array of the specified element 2547/// type. 2548QualType ASTContext::getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType, 2549 Expr *numElements, 2550 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, 2551 unsigned elementTypeQuals, 2552 SourceRange brackets) const { 2553 assert((!numElements || numElements->isTypeDependent() || 2554 numElements->isValueDependent()) && 2555 "Size must be type- or value-dependent!"); 2556 2557 // Dependently-sized array types that do not have a specified number 2558 // of elements will have their sizes deduced from a dependent 2559 // initializer. We do no canonicalization here at all, which is okay 2560 // because they can't be used in most locations. 2561 if (!numElements) { 2562 DependentSizedArrayType *newType 2563 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2564 DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, QualType(), 2565 numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals, 2566 brackets); 2567 Types.push_back(newType); 2568 return QualType(newType, 0); 2569 } 2570 2571 // Otherwise, we actually build a new type every time, but we 2572 // also build a canonical type. 2573 2574 SplitQualType canonElementType = getCanonicalType(elementType).split(); 2575 2576 void *insertPos = 0; 2577 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2578 DependentSizedArrayType::Profile(ID, *this, 2579 QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0), 2580 ASM, elementTypeQuals, numElements); 2581 2582 // Look for an existing type with these properties. 2583 DependentSizedArrayType *canonTy = 2584 DependentSizedArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos); 2585 2586 // If we don't have one, build one. 2587 if (!canonTy) { 2588 canonTy = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2589 DependentSizedArrayType(*this, QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0), 2590 QualType(), numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals, 2591 brackets); 2592 DependentSizedArrayTypes.InsertNode(canonTy, insertPos); 2593 Types.push_back(canonTy); 2594 } 2595 2596 // Apply qualifiers from the element type to the array. 2597 QualType canon = getQualifiedType(QualType(canonTy,0), 2598 canonElementType.Quals); 2599 2600 // If we didn't need extra canonicalization for the element type, 2601 // then just use that as our result. 2602 if (QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0) == elementType) 2603 return canon; 2604 2605 // Otherwise, we need to build a type which follows the spelling 2606 // of the element type. 2607 DependentSizedArrayType *sugaredType 2608 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2609 DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, canon, numElements, 2610 ASM, elementTypeQuals, brackets); 2611 Types.push_back(sugaredType); 2612 return QualType(sugaredType, 0); 2613} 2614 2615QualType ASTContext::getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType, 2616 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, 2617 unsigned elementTypeQuals) const { 2618 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2619 IncompleteArrayType::Profile(ID, elementType, ASM, elementTypeQuals); 2620 2621 void *insertPos = 0; 2622 if (IncompleteArrayType *iat = 2623 IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) 2624 return QualType(iat, 0); 2625 2626 // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type 2627 // either, so fill in the canonical type field. We also have to pull 2628 // qualifiers off the element type. 2629 QualType canon; 2630 2631 if (!elementType.isCanonical() || elementType.hasLocalQualifiers()) { 2632 SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(elementType).split(); 2633 canon = getIncompleteArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), 2634 ASM, elementTypeQuals); 2635 canon = getQualifiedType(canon, canonSplit.Quals); 2636 2637 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2638 IncompleteArrayType *existing = 2639 IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos); 2640 assert(!existing && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void) existing; 2641 } 2642 2643 IncompleteArrayType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2644 IncompleteArrayType(elementType, canon, ASM, elementTypeQuals); 2645 2646 IncompleteArrayTypes.InsertNode(newType, insertPos); 2647 Types.push_back(newType); 2648 return QualType(newType, 0); 2649} 2650 2651/// getVectorType - Return the unique reference to a vector type of 2652/// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type. 2653QualType ASTContext::getVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts, 2654 VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const { 2655 assert(vecType->isBuiltinType()); 2656 2657 // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type. 2658 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2659 VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::Vector, VecKind); 2660 2661 void *InsertPos = 0; 2662 if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2663 return QualType(VTP, 0); 2664 2665 // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, 2666 // so fill in the canonical type field. 2667 QualType Canonical; 2668 if (!vecType.isCanonical()) { 2669 Canonical = getVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts, VecKind); 2670 2671 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2672 VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2673 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2674 } 2675 VectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2676 VectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical, VecKind); 2677 VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2678 Types.push_back(New); 2679 return QualType(New, 0); 2680} 2681 2682/// getExtVectorType - Return the unique reference to an extended vector type of 2683/// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type. 2684QualType 2685ASTContext::getExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts) const { 2686 assert(vecType->isBuiltinType() || vecType->isDependentType()); 2687 2688 // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type. 2689 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2690 VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::ExtVector, 2691 VectorType::GenericVector); 2692 void *InsertPos = 0; 2693 if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2694 return QualType(VTP, 0); 2695 2696 // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, 2697 // so fill in the canonical type field. 2698 QualType Canonical; 2699 if (!vecType.isCanonical()) { 2700 Canonical = getExtVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts); 2701 2702 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2703 VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2704 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2705 } 2706 ExtVectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2707 ExtVectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical); 2708 VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2709 Types.push_back(New); 2710 return QualType(New, 0); 2711} 2712 2713QualType 2714ASTContext::getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType, 2715 Expr *SizeExpr, 2716 SourceLocation AttrLoc) const { 2717 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2718 DependentSizedExtVectorType::Profile(ID, *this, getCanonicalType(vecType), 2719 SizeExpr); 2720 2721 void *InsertPos = 0; 2722 DependentSizedExtVectorType *Canon 2723 = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2724 DependentSizedExtVectorType *New; 2725 if (Canon) { 2726 // We already have a canonical version of this array type; use it as 2727 // the canonical type for a newly-built type. 2728 New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2729 DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(Canon, 0), 2730 SizeExpr, AttrLoc); 2731 } else { 2732 QualType CanonVecTy = getCanonicalType(vecType); 2733 if (CanonVecTy == vecType) { 2734 New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2735 DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(), SizeExpr, 2736 AttrLoc); 2737 2738 DependentSizedExtVectorType *CanonCheck 2739 = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2740 assert(!CanonCheck && "Dependent-sized ext_vector canonical type broken"); 2741 (void)CanonCheck; 2742 DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2743 } else { 2744 QualType Canon = getDependentSizedExtVectorType(CanonVecTy, SizeExpr, 2745 SourceLocation()); 2746 New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2747 DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, Canon, SizeExpr, AttrLoc); 2748 } 2749 } 2750 2751 Types.push_back(New); 2752 return QualType(New, 0); 2753} 2754 2755/// getFunctionNoProtoType - Return a K&R style C function type like 'int()'. 2756/// 2757QualType 2758ASTContext::getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy, 2759 const FunctionType::ExtInfo &Info) const { 2760 const CallingConv CallConv = Info.getCC(); 2761 2762 // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular 2763 // structure. 2764 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2765 FunctionNoProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, Info); 2766 2767 void *InsertPos = 0; 2768 if (FunctionNoProtoType *FT = 2769 FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2770 return QualType(FT, 0); 2771 2772 QualType Canonical; 2773 if (!ResultTy.isCanonical()) { 2774 Canonical = getFunctionNoProtoType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy), Info); 2775 2776 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2777 FunctionNoProtoType *NewIP = 2778 FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2779 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2780 } 2781 2782 FunctionProtoType::ExtInfo newInfo = Info.withCallingConv(CallConv); 2783 FunctionNoProtoType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 2784 FunctionNoProtoType(ResultTy, Canonical, newInfo); 2785 Types.push_back(New); 2786 FunctionNoProtoTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 2787 return QualType(New, 0); 2788} 2789 2790/// \brief Determine whether \p T is canonical as the result type of a function. 2791static bool isCanonicalResultType(QualType T) { 2792 return T.isCanonical() && 2793 (T.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_None || 2794 T.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone); 2795} 2796 2797/// getFunctionType - Return a normal function type with a typed argument 2798/// list. isVariadic indicates whether the argument list includes '...'. 2799QualType 2800ASTContext::getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy, ArrayRef<QualType> ArgArray, 2801 const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo &EPI) const { 2802 size_t NumArgs = ArgArray.size(); 2803 2804 // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular 2805 // structure. 2806 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 2807 FunctionProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, ArgArray.begin(), NumArgs, EPI, 2808 *this); 2809 2810 void *InsertPos = 0; 2811 if (FunctionProtoType *FTP = 2812 FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 2813 return QualType(FTP, 0); 2814 2815 // Determine whether the type being created is already canonical or not. 2816 bool isCanonical = 2817 EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_None && isCanonicalResultType(ResultTy) && 2818 !EPI.HasTrailingReturn; 2819 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs && isCanonical; ++i) 2820 if (!ArgArray[i].isCanonicalAsParam()) 2821 isCanonical = false; 2822 2823 // If this type isn't canonical, get the canonical version of it. 2824 // The exception spec is not part of the canonical type. 2825 QualType Canonical; 2826 if (!isCanonical) { 2827 SmallVector<QualType, 16> CanonicalArgs; 2828 CanonicalArgs.reserve(NumArgs); 2829 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i) 2830 CanonicalArgs.push_back(getCanonicalParamType(ArgArray[i])); 2831 2832 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo CanonicalEPI = EPI; 2833 CanonicalEPI.HasTrailingReturn = false; 2834 CanonicalEPI.ExceptionSpecType = EST_None; 2835 CanonicalEPI.NumExceptions = 0; 2836 2837 // Result types do not have ARC lifetime qualifiers. 2838 QualType CanResultTy = getCanonicalType(ResultTy); 2839 if (ResultTy.getQualifiers().hasObjCLifetime()) { 2840 Qualifiers Qs = CanResultTy.getQualifiers(); 2841 Qs.removeObjCLifetime(); 2842 CanResultTy = getQualifiedType(CanResultTy.getUnqualifiedType(), Qs); 2843 } 2844 2845 Canonical = getFunctionType(CanResultTy, CanonicalArgs, CanonicalEPI); 2846 2847 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 2848 FunctionProtoType *NewIP = 2849 FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 2850 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 2851 } 2852 2853 // FunctionProtoType objects are allocated with extra bytes after 2854 // them for three variable size arrays at the end: 2855 // - parameter types 2856 // - exception types 2857 // - consumed-arguments flags 2858 // Instead of the exception types, there could be a noexcept 2859 // expression, or information used to resolve the exception 2860 // specification. 2861 size_t Size = sizeof(FunctionProtoType) + 2862 NumArgs * sizeof(QualType); 2863 if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Dynamic) { 2864 Size += EPI.NumExceptions * sizeof(QualType); 2865 } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_ComputedNoexcept) { 2866 Size += sizeof(Expr*); 2867 } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Uninstantiated) { 2868 Size += 2 * sizeof(FunctionDecl*); 2869 } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Unevaluated) { 2870 Size += sizeof(FunctionDecl*); 2871 } 2872 if (EPI.ConsumedArguments) 2873 Size += NumArgs * sizeof(bool); 2874 2875 FunctionProtoType *FTP = (FunctionProtoType*) Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment); 2876 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo newEPI = EPI; 2877 new (FTP) FunctionProtoType(ResultTy, ArgArray, Canonical, newEPI); 2878 Types.push_back(FTP); 2879 FunctionProtoTypes.InsertNode(FTP, InsertPos); 2880 return QualType(FTP, 0); 2881} 2882 2883#ifndef NDEBUG 2884static bool NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl *D) { 2885 if (!isa<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) return false; 2886 const CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D); 2887 if (isa<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl>(RD)) 2888 return true; 2889 if (RD->getDescribedClassTemplate() && 2890 !isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RD)) 2891 return true; 2892 return false; 2893} 2894#endif 2895 2896/// getInjectedClassNameType - Return the unique reference to the 2897/// injected class name type for the specified templated declaration. 2898QualType ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *Decl, 2899 QualType TST) const { 2900 assert(NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Decl)); 2901 if (Decl->TypeForDecl) { 2902 assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl)); 2903 } else if (CXXRecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) { 2904 assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous declaration has no type"); 2905 Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl; 2906 assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl)); 2907 } else { 2908 Type *newType = 2909 new (*this, TypeAlignment) InjectedClassNameType(Decl, TST); 2910 Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; 2911 Types.push_back(newType); 2912 } 2913 return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); 2914} 2915 2916/// getTypeDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the 2917/// specified type declaration. 2918QualType ASTContext::getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl *Decl) const { 2919 assert(Decl && "Passed null for Decl param"); 2920 assert(!Decl->TypeForDecl && "TypeForDecl present in slow case"); 2921 2922 if (const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = dyn_cast<TypedefNameDecl>(Decl)) 2923 return getTypedefType(Typedef); 2924 2925 assert(!isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(Decl) && 2926 "Template type parameter types are always available."); 2927 2928 if (const RecordDecl *Record = dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(Decl)) { 2929 assert(Record->isFirstDecl() && "struct/union has previous declaration"); 2930 assert(!NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Record)); 2931 return getRecordType(Record); 2932 } else if (const EnumDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(Decl)) { 2933 assert(Enum->isFirstDecl() && "enum has previous declaration"); 2934 return getEnumType(Enum); 2935 } else if (const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Using = 2936 dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Decl)) { 2937 Type *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnresolvedUsingType(Using); 2938 Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; 2939 Types.push_back(newType); 2940 } else 2941 llvm_unreachable("TypeDecl without a type?"); 2942 2943 return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); 2944} 2945 2946/// getTypedefType - Return the unique reference to the type for the 2947/// specified typedef name decl. 2948QualType 2949ASTContext::getTypedefType(const TypedefNameDecl *Decl, 2950 QualType Canonical) const { 2951 if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); 2952 2953 if (Canonical.isNull()) 2954 Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decl->getUnderlyingType()); 2955 TypedefType *newType = new(*this, TypeAlignment) 2956 TypedefType(Type::Typedef, Decl, Canonical); 2957 Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; 2958 Types.push_back(newType); 2959 return QualType(newType, 0); 2960} 2961 2962QualType ASTContext::getRecordType(const RecordDecl *Decl) const { 2963 if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); 2964 2965 if (const RecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) 2966 if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl) 2967 return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0); 2968 2969 RecordType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RecordType(Decl); 2970 Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; 2971 Types.push_back(newType); 2972 return QualType(newType, 0); 2973} 2974 2975QualType ASTContext::getEnumType(const EnumDecl *Decl) const { 2976 if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); 2977 2978 if (const EnumDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) 2979 if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl) 2980 return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0); 2981 2982 EnumType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) EnumType(Decl); 2983 Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; 2984 Types.push_back(newType); 2985 return QualType(newType, 0); 2986} 2987 2988QualType ASTContext::getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind, 2989 QualType modifiedType, 2990 QualType equivalentType) { 2991 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id; 2992 AttributedType::Profile(id, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType); 2993 2994 void *insertPos = 0; 2995 AttributedType *type = AttributedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos); 2996 if (type) return QualType(type, 0); 2997 2998 QualType canon = getCanonicalType(equivalentType); 2999 type = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 3000 AttributedType(canon, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType); 3001 3002 Types.push_back(type); 3003 AttributedTypes.InsertNode(type, insertPos); 3004 3005 return QualType(type, 0); 3006} 3007 3008 3009/// \brief Retrieve a substitution-result type. 3010QualType 3011ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm, 3012 QualType Replacement) const { 3013 assert(Replacement.isCanonical() 3014 && "replacement types must always be canonical"); 3015 3016 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3017 SubstTemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Parm, Replacement); 3018 void *InsertPos = 0; 3019 SubstTemplateTypeParmType *SubstParm 3020 = SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3021 3022 if (!SubstParm) { 3023 SubstParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 3024 SubstTemplateTypeParmType(Parm, Replacement); 3025 Types.push_back(SubstParm); 3026 SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos); 3027 } 3028 3029 return QualType(SubstParm, 0); 3030} 3031 3032/// \brief Retrieve a 3033QualType ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType( 3034 const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm, 3035 const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) { 3036#ifndef NDEBUG 3037 for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator P = ArgPack.pack_begin(), 3038 PEnd = ArgPack.pack_end(); 3039 P != PEnd; ++P) { 3040 assert(P->getKind() == TemplateArgument::Type &&"Pack contains a non-type"); 3041 assert(P->getAsType().isCanonical() && "Pack contains non-canonical type"); 3042 } 3043#endif 3044 3045 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3046 SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType::Profile(ID, Parm, ArgPack); 3047 void *InsertPos = 0; 3048 if (SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm 3049 = SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 3050 return QualType(SubstParm, 0); 3051 3052 QualType Canon; 3053 if (!Parm->isCanonicalUnqualified()) { 3054 Canon = getCanonicalType(QualType(Parm, 0)); 3055 Canon = getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(cast<TemplateTypeParmType>(Canon), 3056 ArgPack); 3057 SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3058 } 3059 3060 SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm 3061 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(Parm, Canon, 3062 ArgPack); 3063 Types.push_back(SubstParm); 3064 SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos); 3065 return QualType(SubstParm, 0); 3066} 3067 3068/// \brief Retrieve the template type parameter type for a template 3069/// parameter or parameter pack with the given depth, index, and (optionally) 3070/// name. 3071QualType ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth, unsigned Index, 3072 bool ParameterPack, 3073 TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl) const { 3074 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3075 TemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Depth, Index, ParameterPack, TTPDecl); 3076 void *InsertPos = 0; 3077 TemplateTypeParmType *TypeParm 3078 = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3079 3080 if (TypeParm) 3081 return QualType(TypeParm, 0); 3082 3083 if (TTPDecl) { 3084 QualType Canon = getTemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack); 3085 TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TemplateTypeParmType(TTPDecl, Canon); 3086 3087 TemplateTypeParmType *TypeCheck 3088 = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3089 assert(!TypeCheck && "Template type parameter canonical type broken"); 3090 (void)TypeCheck; 3091 } else 3092 TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) 3093 TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack); 3094 3095 Types.push_back(TypeParm); 3096 TemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(TypeParm, InsertPos); 3097 3098 return QualType(TypeParm, 0); 3099} 3100 3101TypeSourceInfo * 3102ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name, 3103 SourceLocation NameLoc, 3104 const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args, 3105 QualType Underlying) const { 3106 assert(!Name.getAsDependentTemplateName() && 3107 "No dependent template names here!"); 3108 QualType TST = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name, Args, Underlying); 3109 3110 TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(TST); 3111 TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc TL = 3112 DI->getTypeLoc().castAs<TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc>(); 3113 TL.setTemplateKeywordLoc(SourceLocation()); 3114 TL.setTemplateNameLoc(NameLoc); 3115 TL.setLAngleLoc(Args.getLAngleLoc()); 3116 TL.setRAngleLoc(Args.getRAngleLoc()); 3117 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TL.getNumArgs(); i != e; ++i) 3118 TL.setArgLocInfo(i, Args[i].getLocInfo()); 3119 return DI; 3120} 3121 3122QualType 3123ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template, 3124 const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args, 3125 QualType Underlying) const { 3126 assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() && 3127 "No dependent template names here!"); 3128 3129 unsigned NumArgs = Args.size(); 3130 3131 SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> ArgVec; 3132 ArgVec.reserve(NumArgs); 3133 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i) 3134 ArgVec.push_back(Args[i].getArgument()); 3135 3136 return getTemplateSpecializationType(Template, ArgVec.data(), NumArgs, 3137 Underlying); 3138} 3139 3140#ifndef NDEBUG 3141static bool hasAnyPackExpansions(const TemplateArgument *Args, 3142 unsigned NumArgs) { 3143 for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) 3144 if (Args[I].isPackExpansion()) 3145 return true; 3146 3147 return true; 3148} 3149#endif 3150 3151QualType 3152ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template, 3153 const TemplateArgument *Args, 3154 unsigned NumArgs, 3155 QualType Underlying) const { 3156 assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() && 3157 "No dependent template names here!"); 3158 // Look through qualified template names. 3159 if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName()) 3160 Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl()); 3161 3162 bool IsTypeAlias = 3163 Template.getAsTemplateDecl() && 3164 isa<TypeAliasTemplateDecl>(Template.getAsTemplateDecl()); 3165 QualType CanonType; 3166 if (!Underlying.isNull()) 3167 CanonType = getCanonicalType(Underlying); 3168 else { 3169 // We can get here with an alias template when the specialization contains 3170 // a pack expansion that does not match up with a parameter pack. 3171 assert((!IsTypeAlias || hasAnyPackExpansions(Args, NumArgs)) && 3172 "Caller must compute aliased type"); 3173 IsTypeAlias = false; 3174 CanonType = getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, 3175 NumArgs); 3176 } 3177 3178 // Allocate the (non-canonical) template specialization type, but don't 3179 // try to unique it: these types typically have location information that 3180 // we don't unique and don't want to lose. 3181 void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) + 3182 sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs + 3183 (IsTypeAlias? sizeof(QualType) : 0), 3184 TypeAlignment); 3185 TemplateSpecializationType *Spec 3186 = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, NumArgs, CanonType, 3187 IsTypeAlias ? Underlying : QualType()); 3188 3189 Types.push_back(Spec); 3190 return QualType(Spec, 0); 3191} 3192 3193QualType 3194ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template, 3195 const TemplateArgument *Args, 3196 unsigned NumArgs) const { 3197 assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() && 3198 "No dependent template names here!"); 3199 3200 // Look through qualified template names. 3201 if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName()) 3202 Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl()); 3203 3204 // Build the canonical template specialization type. 3205 TemplateName CanonTemplate = getCanonicalTemplateName(Template); 3206 SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> CanonArgs; 3207 CanonArgs.reserve(NumArgs); 3208 for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) 3209 CanonArgs.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I])); 3210 3211 // Determine whether this canonical template specialization type already 3212 // exists. 3213 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3214 TemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, CanonTemplate, 3215 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, *this); 3216 3217 void *InsertPos = 0; 3218 TemplateSpecializationType *Spec 3219 = TemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3220 3221 if (!Spec) { 3222 // Allocate a new canonical template specialization type. 3223 void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) + 3224 sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs), 3225 TypeAlignment); 3226 Spec = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(CanonTemplate, 3227 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, 3228 QualType(), QualType()); 3229 Types.push_back(Spec); 3230 TemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(Spec, InsertPos); 3231 } 3232 3233 assert(Spec->isDependentType() && 3234 "Non-dependent template-id type must have a canonical type"); 3235 return QualType(Spec, 0); 3236} 3237 3238QualType 3239ASTContext::getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, 3240 NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, 3241 QualType NamedType) const { 3242 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3243 ElaboratedType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, NamedType); 3244 3245 void *InsertPos = 0; 3246 ElaboratedType *T = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3247 if (T) 3248 return QualType(T, 0); 3249 3250 QualType Canon = NamedType; 3251 if (!Canon.isCanonical()) { 3252 Canon = getCanonicalType(NamedType); 3253 ElaboratedType *CheckT = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3254 assert(!CheckT && "Elaborated canonical type broken"); 3255 (void)CheckT; 3256 } 3257 3258 T = new (*this) ElaboratedType(Keyword, NNS, NamedType, Canon); 3259 Types.push_back(T); 3260 ElaboratedTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); 3261 return QualType(T, 0); 3262} 3263 3264QualType 3265ASTContext::getParenType(QualType InnerType) const { 3266 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3267 ParenType::Profile(ID, InnerType); 3268 3269 void *InsertPos = 0; 3270 ParenType *T = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3271 if (T) 3272 return QualType(T, 0); 3273 3274 QualType Canon = InnerType; 3275 if (!Canon.isCanonical()) { 3276 Canon = getCanonicalType(InnerType); 3277 ParenType *CheckT = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3278 assert(!CheckT && "Paren canonical type broken"); 3279 (void)CheckT; 3280 } 3281 3282 T = new (*this) ParenType(InnerType, Canon); 3283 Types.push_back(T); 3284 ParenTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); 3285 return QualType(T, 0); 3286} 3287 3288QualType ASTContext::getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, 3289 NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, 3290 const IdentifierInfo *Name, 3291 QualType Canon) const { 3292 assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent"); 3293 3294 if (Canon.isNull()) { 3295 NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); 3296 ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword; 3297 if (Keyword == ETK_None) 3298 CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename; 3299 3300 if (CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) 3301 Canon = getDependentNameType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, Name); 3302 } 3303 3304 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3305 DependentNameType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, Name); 3306 3307 void *InsertPos = 0; 3308 DependentNameType *T 3309 = DependentNameTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3310 if (T) 3311 return QualType(T, 0); 3312 3313 T = new (*this) DependentNameType(Keyword, NNS, Name, Canon); 3314 Types.push_back(T); 3315 DependentNameTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); 3316 return QualType(T, 0); 3317} 3318 3319QualType 3320ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType( 3321 ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, 3322 NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, 3323 const IdentifierInfo *Name, 3324 const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args) const { 3325 // TODO: avoid this copy 3326 SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> ArgCopy; 3327 for (unsigned I = 0, E = Args.size(); I != E; ++I) 3328 ArgCopy.push_back(Args[I].getArgument()); 3329 return getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, Name, 3330 ArgCopy.size(), 3331 ArgCopy.data()); 3332} 3333 3334QualType 3335ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType( 3336 ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, 3337 NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, 3338 const IdentifierInfo *Name, 3339 unsigned NumArgs, 3340 const TemplateArgument *Args) const { 3341 assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) && 3342 "nested-name-specifier must be dependent"); 3343 3344 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3345 DependentTemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, *this, Keyword, NNS, 3346 Name, NumArgs, Args); 3347 3348 void *InsertPos = 0; 3349 DependentTemplateSpecializationType *T 3350 = DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3351 if (T) 3352 return QualType(T, 0); 3353 3354 NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); 3355 3356 ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword; 3357 if (Keyword == ETK_None) CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename; 3358 3359 bool AnyNonCanonArgs = false; 3360 SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> CanonArgs(NumArgs); 3361 for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) { 3362 CanonArgs[I] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]); 3363 if (!CanonArgs[I].structurallyEquals(Args[I])) 3364 AnyNonCanonArgs = true; 3365 } 3366 3367 QualType Canon; 3368 if (AnyNonCanonArgs || CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) { 3369 Canon = getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, 3370 Name, NumArgs, 3371 CanonArgs.data()); 3372 3373 // Find the insert position again. 3374 DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3375 } 3376 3377 void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(DependentTemplateSpecializationType) + 3378 sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs), 3379 TypeAlignment); 3380 T = new (Mem) DependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, 3381 Name, NumArgs, Args, Canon); 3382 Types.push_back(T); 3383 DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); 3384 return QualType(T, 0); 3385} 3386 3387QualType ASTContext::getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern, 3388 Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) { 3389 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3390 PackExpansionType::Profile(ID, Pattern, NumExpansions); 3391 3392 assert(Pattern->containsUnexpandedParameterPack() && 3393 "Pack expansions must expand one or more parameter packs"); 3394 void *InsertPos = 0; 3395 PackExpansionType *T 3396 = PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3397 if (T) 3398 return QualType(T, 0); 3399 3400 QualType Canon; 3401 if (!Pattern.isCanonical()) { 3402 Canon = getCanonicalType(Pattern); 3403 // The canonical type might not contain an unexpanded parameter pack, if it 3404 // contains an alias template specialization which ignores one of its 3405 // parameters. 3406 if (Canon->containsUnexpandedParameterPack()) { 3407 Canon = getPackExpansionType(getCanonicalType(Pattern), NumExpansions); 3408 3409 // Find the insert position again, in case we inserted an element into 3410 // PackExpansionTypes and invalidated our insert position. 3411 PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3412 } 3413 } 3414 3415 T = new (*this) PackExpansionType(Pattern, Canon, NumExpansions); 3416 Types.push_back(T); 3417 PackExpansionTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); 3418 return QualType(T, 0); 3419} 3420 3421/// CmpProtocolNames - Comparison predicate for sorting protocols 3422/// alphabetically. 3423static bool CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl *LHS, 3424 const ObjCProtocolDecl *RHS) { 3425 return LHS->getDeclName() < RHS->getDeclName(); 3426} 3427 3428static bool areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols, 3429 unsigned NumProtocols) { 3430 if (NumProtocols == 0) return true; 3431 3432 if (Protocols[0]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[0]) 3433 return false; 3434 3435 for (unsigned i = 1; i != NumProtocols; ++i) 3436 if (!CmpProtocolNames(Protocols[i-1], Protocols[i]) || 3437 Protocols[i]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[i]) 3438 return false; 3439 return true; 3440} 3441 3442static void SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl **Protocols, 3443 unsigned &NumProtocols) { 3444 ObjCProtocolDecl **ProtocolsEnd = Protocols+NumProtocols; 3445 3446 // Sort protocols, keyed by name. 3447 std::sort(Protocols, Protocols+NumProtocols, CmpProtocolNames); 3448 3449 // Canonicalize. 3450 for (unsigned I = 0, N = NumProtocols; I != N; ++I) 3451 Protocols[I] = Protocols[I]->getCanonicalDecl(); 3452 3453 // Remove duplicates. 3454 ProtocolsEnd = std::unique(Protocols, ProtocolsEnd); 3455 NumProtocols = ProtocolsEnd-Protocols; 3456} 3457 3458QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType, 3459 ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols, 3460 unsigned NumProtocols) const { 3461 // If the base type is an interface and there aren't any protocols 3462 // to add, then the interface type will do just fine. 3463 if (!NumProtocols && isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(BaseType)) 3464 return BaseType; 3465 3466 // Look in the folding set for an existing type. 3467 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3468 ObjCObjectTypeImpl::Profile(ID, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols); 3469 void *InsertPos = 0; 3470 if (ObjCObjectType *QT = ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 3471 return QualType(QT, 0); 3472 3473 // Build the canonical type, which has the canonical base type and 3474 // a sorted-and-uniqued list of protocols. 3475 QualType Canonical; 3476 bool ProtocolsSorted = areSortedAndUniqued(Protocols, NumProtocols); 3477 if (!ProtocolsSorted || !BaseType.isCanonical()) { 3478 if (!ProtocolsSorted) { 3479 SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> Sorted(Protocols, 3480 Protocols + NumProtocols); 3481 unsigned UniqueCount = NumProtocols; 3482 3483 SortAndUniqueProtocols(&Sorted[0], UniqueCount); 3484 Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType), 3485 &Sorted[0], UniqueCount); 3486 } else { 3487 Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType), 3488 Protocols, NumProtocols); 3489 } 3490 3491 // Regenerate InsertPos. 3492 ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3493 } 3494 3495 unsigned Size = sizeof(ObjCObjectTypeImpl); 3496 Size += NumProtocols * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl *); 3497 void *Mem = Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment); 3498 ObjCObjectTypeImpl *T = 3499 new (Mem) ObjCObjectTypeImpl(Canonical, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols); 3500 3501 Types.push_back(T); 3502 ObjCObjectTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); 3503 return QualType(T, 0); 3504} 3505 3506/// getObjCObjectPointerType - Return a ObjCObjectPointerType type for 3507/// the given object type. 3508QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const { 3509 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3510 ObjCObjectPointerType::Profile(ID, ObjectT); 3511 3512 void *InsertPos = 0; 3513 if (ObjCObjectPointerType *QT = 3514 ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 3515 return QualType(QT, 0); 3516 3517 // Find the canonical object type. 3518 QualType Canonical; 3519 if (!ObjectT.isCanonical()) { 3520 Canonical = getObjCObjectPointerType(getCanonicalType(ObjectT)); 3521 3522 // Regenerate InsertPos. 3523 ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3524 } 3525 3526 // No match. 3527 void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCObjectPointerType), TypeAlignment); 3528 ObjCObjectPointerType *QType = 3529 new (Mem) ObjCObjectPointerType(Canonical, ObjectT); 3530 3531 Types.push_back(QType); 3532 ObjCObjectPointerTypes.InsertNode(QType, InsertPos); 3533 return QualType(QType, 0); 3534} 3535 3536/// getObjCInterfaceType - Return the unique reference to the type for the 3537/// specified ObjC interface decl. The list of protocols is optional. 3538QualType ASTContext::getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl, 3539 ObjCInterfaceDecl *PrevDecl) const { 3540 if (Decl->TypeForDecl) 3541 return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); 3542 3543 if (PrevDecl) { 3544 assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous decl has no TypeForDecl"); 3545 Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl; 3546 return QualType(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0); 3547 } 3548 3549 // Prefer the definition, if there is one. 3550 if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Def = Decl->getDefinition()) 3551 Decl = Def; 3552 3553 void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCInterfaceType), TypeAlignment); 3554 ObjCInterfaceType *T = new (Mem) ObjCInterfaceType(Decl); 3555 Decl->TypeForDecl = T; 3556 Types.push_back(T); 3557 return QualType(T, 0); 3558} 3559 3560/// getTypeOfExprType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we can't unique 3561/// TypeOfExprType AST's (since expression's are never shared). For example, 3562/// multiple declarations that refer to "typeof(x)" all contain different 3563/// DeclRefExpr's. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates 3564/// on canonical type's (which are always unique). 3565QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfExprType(Expr *tofExpr) const { 3566 TypeOfExprType *toe; 3567 if (tofExpr->isTypeDependent()) { 3568 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3569 DependentTypeOfExprType::Profile(ID, *this, tofExpr); 3570 3571 void *InsertPos = 0; 3572 DependentTypeOfExprType *Canon 3573 = DependentTypeOfExprTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3574 if (Canon) { 3575 // We already have a "canonical" version of an identical, dependent 3576 // typeof(expr) type. Use that as our canonical type. 3577 toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, 3578 QualType((TypeOfExprType*)Canon, 0)); 3579 } else { 3580 // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type. 3581 Canon 3582 = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentTypeOfExprType(*this, tofExpr); 3583 DependentTypeOfExprTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos); 3584 toe = Canon; 3585 } 3586 } else { 3587 QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofExpr->getType()); 3588 toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, Canonical); 3589 } 3590 Types.push_back(toe); 3591 return QualType(toe, 0); 3592} 3593 3594/// getTypeOfType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique 3595/// TypeOfType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be 3596/// memory savings. Since typeof(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be 3597/// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates 3598/// on canonical type's (which are always unique). 3599QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const { 3600 QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofType); 3601 TypeOfType *tot = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfType(tofType, Canonical); 3602 Types.push_back(tot); 3603 return QualType(tot, 0); 3604} 3605 3606 3607/// getDecltypeType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique 3608/// DecltypeType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be 3609/// memory savings. Since decltype(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be 3610/// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates 3611/// on canonical types (which are always unique). 3612QualType ASTContext::getDecltypeType(Expr *e, QualType UnderlyingType) const { 3613 DecltypeType *dt; 3614 3615 // C++0x [temp.type]p2: 3616 // If an expression e involves a template parameter, decltype(e) denotes a 3617 // unique dependent type. Two such decltype-specifiers refer to the same 3618 // type only if their expressions are equivalent (14.5.6.1). 3619 if (e->isInstantiationDependent()) { 3620 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3621 DependentDecltypeType::Profile(ID, *this, e); 3622 3623 void *InsertPos = 0; 3624 DependentDecltypeType *Canon 3625 = DependentDecltypeTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3626 if (Canon) { 3627 // We already have a "canonical" version of an equivalent, dependent 3628 // decltype type. Use that as our canonical type. 3629 dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType, 3630 QualType((DecltypeType*)Canon, 0)); 3631 } else { 3632 // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type. 3633 Canon = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentDecltypeType(*this, e); 3634 DependentDecltypeTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos); 3635 dt = Canon; 3636 } 3637 } else { 3638 dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType, 3639 getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType)); 3640 } 3641 Types.push_back(dt); 3642 return QualType(dt, 0); 3643} 3644 3645/// getUnaryTransformationType - We don't unique these, since the memory 3646/// savings are minimal and these are rare. 3647QualType ASTContext::getUnaryTransformType(QualType BaseType, 3648 QualType UnderlyingType, 3649 UnaryTransformType::UTTKind Kind) 3650 const { 3651 UnaryTransformType *Ty = 3652 new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnaryTransformType (BaseType, UnderlyingType, 3653 Kind, 3654 UnderlyingType->isDependentType() ? 3655 QualType() : getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType)); 3656 Types.push_back(Ty); 3657 return QualType(Ty, 0); 3658} 3659 3660/// getAutoType - Return the uniqued reference to the 'auto' type which has been 3661/// deduced to the given type, or to the canonical undeduced 'auto' type, or the 3662/// canonical deduced-but-dependent 'auto' type. 3663QualType ASTContext::getAutoType(QualType DeducedType, bool IsDecltypeAuto, 3664 bool IsDependent) const { 3665 if (DeducedType.isNull() && !IsDecltypeAuto && !IsDependent) 3666 return getAutoDeductType(); 3667 3668 // Look in the folding set for an existing type. 3669 void *InsertPos = 0; 3670 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3671 AutoType::Profile(ID, DeducedType, IsDecltypeAuto, IsDependent); 3672 if (AutoType *AT = AutoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 3673 return QualType(AT, 0); 3674 3675 AutoType *AT = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AutoType(DeducedType, 3676 IsDecltypeAuto, 3677 IsDependent); 3678 Types.push_back(AT); 3679 if (InsertPos) 3680 AutoTypes.InsertNode(AT, InsertPos); 3681 return QualType(AT, 0); 3682} 3683 3684/// getAtomicType - Return the uniqued reference to the atomic type for 3685/// the given value type. 3686QualType ASTContext::getAtomicType(QualType T) const { 3687 // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular 3688 // structure. 3689 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 3690 AtomicType::Profile(ID, T); 3691 3692 void *InsertPos = 0; 3693 if (AtomicType *AT = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) 3694 return QualType(AT, 0); 3695 3696 // If the atomic value type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type 3697 // either, so fill in the canonical type field. 3698 QualType Canonical; 3699 if (!T.isCanonical()) { 3700 Canonical = getAtomicType(getCanonicalType(T)); 3701 3702 // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. 3703 AtomicType *NewIP = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 3704 assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; 3705 } 3706 AtomicType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AtomicType(T, Canonical); 3707 Types.push_back(New); 3708 AtomicTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); 3709 return QualType(New, 0); 3710} 3711 3712/// getAutoDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto'. 3713QualType ASTContext::getAutoDeductType() const { 3714 if (AutoDeductTy.isNull()) 3715 AutoDeductTy = QualType( 3716 new (*this, TypeAlignment) AutoType(QualType(), /*decltype(auto)*/false, 3717 /*dependent*/false), 3718 0); 3719 return AutoDeductTy; 3720} 3721 3722/// getAutoRRefDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto &&'. 3723QualType ASTContext::getAutoRRefDeductType() const { 3724 if (AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull()) 3725 AutoRRefDeductTy = getRValueReferenceType(getAutoDeductType()); 3726 assert(!AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto &&' pattern"); 3727 return AutoRRefDeductTy; 3728} 3729 3730/// getTagDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the 3731/// specified TagDecl (struct/union/class/enum) decl. 3732QualType ASTContext::getTagDeclType(const TagDecl *Decl) const { 3733 assert (Decl); 3734 // FIXME: What is the design on getTagDeclType when it requires casting 3735 // away const? mutable? 3736 return getTypeDeclType(const_cast<TagDecl*>(Decl)); 3737} 3738 3739/// getSizeType - Return the unique type for "size_t" (C99 7.17), the result 3740/// of the sizeof operator (C99 6.5.3.4p4). The value is target dependent and 3741/// needs to agree with the definition in <stddef.h>. 3742CanQualType ASTContext::getSizeType() const { 3743 return getFromTargetType(Target->getSizeType()); 3744} 3745 3746/// getIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "intmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5). 3747CanQualType ASTContext::getIntMaxType() const { 3748 return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntMaxType()); 3749} 3750 3751/// getUIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "uintmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5). 3752CanQualType ASTContext::getUIntMaxType() const { 3753 return getFromTargetType(Target->getUIntMaxType()); 3754} 3755 3756/// getSignedWCharType - Return the type of "signed wchar_t". 3757/// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension. 3758QualType ASTContext::getSignedWCharType() const { 3759 // FIXME: derive from "Target" ? 3760 return WCharTy; 3761} 3762 3763/// getUnsignedWCharType - Return the type of "unsigned wchar_t". 3764/// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension. 3765QualType ASTContext::getUnsignedWCharType() const { 3766 // FIXME: derive from "Target" ? 3767 return UnsignedIntTy; 3768} 3769 3770QualType ASTContext::getIntPtrType() const { 3771 return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntPtrType()); 3772} 3773 3774QualType ASTContext::getUIntPtrType() const { 3775 return getCorrespondingUnsignedType(getIntPtrType()); 3776} 3777 3778/// getPointerDiffType - Return the unique type for "ptrdiff_t" (C99 7.17) 3779/// defined in <stddef.h>. Pointer - pointer requires this (C99 6.5.6p9). 3780QualType ASTContext::getPointerDiffType() const { 3781 return getFromTargetType(Target->getPtrDiffType(0)); 3782} 3783 3784/// \brief Return the unique type for "pid_t" defined in 3785/// <sys/types.h>. We need this to compute the correct type for vfork(). 3786QualType ASTContext::getProcessIDType() const { 3787 return getFromTargetType(Target->getProcessIDType()); 3788} 3789 3790//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 3791// Type Operators 3792//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 3793 3794CanQualType ASTContext::getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const { 3795 // Push qualifiers into arrays, and then discard any remaining 3796 // qualifiers. 3797 T = getCanonicalType(T); 3798 T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T); 3799 const Type *Ty = T.getTypePtr(); 3800 QualType Result; 3801 if (isa<ArrayType>(Ty)) { 3802 Result = getArrayDecayedType(QualType(Ty,0)); 3803 } else if (isa<FunctionType>(Ty)) { 3804 Result = getPointerType(QualType(Ty, 0)); 3805 } else { 3806 Result = QualType(Ty, 0); 3807 } 3808 3809 return CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(Result); 3810} 3811 3812QualType ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type, 3813 Qualifiers &quals) { 3814 SplitQualType splitType = type.getSplitUnqualifiedType(); 3815 3816 // FIXME: getSplitUnqualifiedType() actually walks all the way to 3817 // the unqualified desugared type and then drops it on the floor. 3818 // We then have to strip that sugar back off with 3819 // getUnqualifiedDesugaredType(), which is silly. 3820 const ArrayType *AT = 3821 dyn_cast<ArrayType>(splitType.Ty->getUnqualifiedDesugaredType()); 3822 3823 // If we don't have an array, just use the results in splitType. 3824 if (!AT) { 3825 quals = splitType.Quals; 3826 return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0); 3827 } 3828 3829 // Otherwise, recurse on the array's element type. 3830 QualType elementType = AT->getElementType(); 3831 QualType unqualElementType = getUnqualifiedArrayType(elementType, quals); 3832 3833 // If that didn't change the element type, AT has no qualifiers, so we 3834 // can just use the results in splitType. 3835 if (elementType == unqualElementType) { 3836 assert(quals.empty()); // from the recursive call 3837 quals = splitType.Quals; 3838 return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0); 3839 } 3840 3841 // Otherwise, add in the qualifiers from the outermost type, then 3842 // build the type back up. 3843 quals.addConsistentQualifiers(splitType.Quals); 3844 3845 if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) { 3846 return getConstantArrayType(unqualElementType, CAT->getSize(), 3847 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 0); 3848 } 3849 3850 if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) { 3851 return getIncompleteArrayType(unqualElementType, IAT->getSizeModifier(), 0); 3852 } 3853 3854 if (const VariableArrayType *VAT = dyn_cast<VariableArrayType>(AT)) { 3855 return getVariableArrayType(unqualElementType, 3856 VAT->getSizeExpr(), 3857 VAT->getSizeModifier(), 3858 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), 3859 VAT->getBracketsRange()); 3860 } 3861 3862 const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(AT); 3863 return getDependentSizedArrayType(unqualElementType, DSAT->getSizeExpr(), 3864 DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 0, 3865 SourceRange()); 3866} 3867 3868/// UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes - If T1 and T2 are pointer types that 3869/// may be similar (C++ 4.4), replaces T1 and T2 with the type that 3870/// they point to and return true. If T1 and T2 aren't pointer types 3871/// or pointer-to-member types, or if they are not similar at this 3872/// level, returns false and leaves T1 and T2 unchanged. Top-level 3873/// qualifiers on T1 and T2 are ignored. This function will typically 3874/// be called in a loop that successively "unwraps" pointer and 3875/// pointer-to-member types to compare them at each level. 3876bool ASTContext::UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType &T1, QualType &T2) { 3877 const PointerType *T1PtrType = T1->getAs<PointerType>(), 3878 *T2PtrType = T2->getAs<PointerType>(); 3879 if (T1PtrType && T2PtrType) { 3880 T1 = T1PtrType->getPointeeType(); 3881 T2 = T2PtrType->getPointeeType(); 3882 return true; 3883 } 3884 3885 const MemberPointerType *T1MPType = T1->getAs<MemberPointerType>(), 3886 *T2MPType = T2->getAs<MemberPointerType>(); 3887 if (T1MPType && T2MPType && 3888 hasSameUnqualifiedType(QualType(T1MPType->getClass(), 0), 3889 QualType(T2MPType->getClass(), 0))) { 3890 T1 = T1MPType->getPointeeType(); 3891 T2 = T2MPType->getPointeeType(); 3892 return true; 3893 } 3894 3895 if (getLangOpts().ObjC1) { 3896 const ObjCObjectPointerType *T1OPType = T1->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), 3897 *T2OPType = T2->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); 3898 if (T1OPType && T2OPType) { 3899 T1 = T1OPType->getPointeeType(); 3900 T2 = T2OPType->getPointeeType(); 3901 return true; 3902 } 3903 } 3904 3905 // FIXME: Block pointers, too? 3906 3907 return false; 3908} 3909 3910DeclarationNameInfo 3911ASTContext::getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name, 3912 SourceLocation NameLoc) const { 3913 switch (Name.getKind()) { 3914 case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate: 3915 case TemplateName::Template: 3916 // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc? 3917 return DeclarationNameInfo(Name.getAsTemplateDecl()->getDeclName(), 3918 NameLoc); 3919 3920 case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate: { 3921 OverloadedTemplateStorage *Storage = Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate(); 3922 // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc? 3923 return DeclarationNameInfo((*Storage->begin())->getDeclName(), NameLoc); 3924 } 3925 3926 case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: { 3927 DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName(); 3928 DeclarationName DName; 3929 if (DTN->isIdentifier()) { 3930 DName = DeclarationNames.getIdentifier(DTN->getIdentifier()); 3931 return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc); 3932 } else { 3933 DName = DeclarationNames.getCXXOperatorName(DTN->getOperator()); 3934 // DNInfo work in progress: FIXME: source locations? 3935 DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc; 3936 DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.BeginOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding(); 3937 DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.EndOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding(); 3938 return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc, DNLoc); 3939 } 3940 } 3941 3942 case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: { 3943 SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst 3944 = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm(); 3945 return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameter()->getDeclName(), 3946 NameLoc); 3947 } 3948 3949 case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: { 3950 SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst 3951 = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(); 3952 return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameterPack()->getDeclName(), 3953 NameLoc); 3954 } 3955 } 3956 3957 llvm_unreachable("bad template name kind!"); 3958} 3959 3960TemplateName ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const { 3961 switch (Name.getKind()) { 3962 case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate: 3963 case TemplateName::Template: { 3964 TemplateDecl *Template = Name.getAsTemplateDecl(); 3965 if (TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP 3966 = dyn_cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(Template)) 3967 Template = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TTP); 3968 3969 // The canonical template name is the canonical template declaration. 3970 return TemplateName(cast<TemplateDecl>(Template->getCanonicalDecl())); 3971 } 3972 3973 case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate: 3974 llvm_unreachable("cannot canonicalize overloaded template"); 3975 3976 case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: { 3977 DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName(); 3978 assert(DTN && "Non-dependent template names must refer to template decls."); 3979 return DTN->CanonicalTemplateName; 3980 } 3981 3982 case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: { 3983 SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst 3984 = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm(); 3985 return getCanonicalTemplateName(subst->getReplacement()); 3986 } 3987 3988 case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: { 3989 SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst 3990 = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(); 3991 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *canonParameter 3992 = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(subst->getParameterPack()); 3993 TemplateArgument canonArgPack 3994 = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(subst->getArgumentPack()); 3995 return getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(canonParameter, canonArgPack); 3996 } 3997 } 3998 3999 llvm_unreachable("bad template name!"); 4000} 4001 4002bool ASTContext::hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X, TemplateName Y) { 4003 X = getCanonicalTemplateName(X); 4004 Y = getCanonicalTemplateName(Y); 4005 return X.getAsVoidPointer() == Y.getAsVoidPointer(); 4006} 4007 4008TemplateArgument 4009ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument &Arg) const { 4010 switch (Arg.getKind()) { 4011 case TemplateArgument::Null: 4012 return Arg; 4013 4014 case TemplateArgument::Expression: 4015 return Arg; 4016 4017 case TemplateArgument::Declaration: { 4018 ValueDecl *D = cast<ValueDecl>(Arg.getAsDecl()->getCanonicalDecl()); 4019 return TemplateArgument(D, Arg.isDeclForReferenceParam()); 4020 } 4021 4022 case TemplateArgument::NullPtr: 4023 return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getNullPtrType()), 4024 /*isNullPtr*/true); 4025 4026 case TemplateArgument::Template: 4027 return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(Arg.getAsTemplate())); 4028 4029 case TemplateArgument::TemplateExpansion: 4030 return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName( 4031 Arg.getAsTemplateOrTemplatePattern()), 4032 Arg.getNumTemplateExpansions()); 4033 4034 case TemplateArgument::Integral: 4035 return TemplateArgument(Arg, getCanonicalType(Arg.getIntegralType())); 4036 4037 case TemplateArgument::Type: 4038 return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getAsType())); 4039 4040 case TemplateArgument::Pack: { 4041 if (Arg.pack_size() == 0) 4042 return Arg; 4043 4044 TemplateArgument *CanonArgs 4045 = new (*this) TemplateArgument[Arg.pack_size()]; 4046 unsigned Idx = 0; 4047 for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator A = Arg.pack_begin(), 4048 AEnd = Arg.pack_end(); 4049 A != AEnd; (void)++A, ++Idx) 4050 CanonArgs[Idx] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(*A); 4051 4052 return TemplateArgument(CanonArgs, Arg.pack_size()); 4053 } 4054 } 4055 4056 // Silence GCC warning 4057 llvm_unreachable("Unhandled template argument kind"); 4058} 4059 4060NestedNameSpecifier * 4061ASTContext::getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS) const { 4062 if (!NNS) 4063 return 0; 4064 4065 switch (NNS->getKind()) { 4066 case NestedNameSpecifier::Identifier: 4067 // Canonicalize the prefix but keep the identifier the same. 4068 return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 4069 getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS->getPrefix()), 4070 NNS->getAsIdentifier()); 4071 4072 case NestedNameSpecifier::Namespace: 4073 // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with 4074 // this namespace and no prefix. 4075 return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, 4076 NNS->getAsNamespace()->getOriginalNamespace()); 4077 4078 case NestedNameSpecifier::NamespaceAlias: 4079 // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with 4080 // this namespace and no prefix. 4081 return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, 4082 NNS->getAsNamespaceAlias()->getNamespace() 4083 ->getOriginalNamespace()); 4084 4085 case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpec: 4086 case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpecWithTemplate: { 4087 QualType T = getCanonicalType(QualType(NNS->getAsType(), 0)); 4088 4089 // If we have some kind of dependent-named type (e.g., "typename T::type"), 4090 // break it apart into its prefix and identifier, then reconsititute those 4091 // as the canonical nested-name-specifier. This is required to canonicalize 4092 // a dependent nested-name-specifier involving typedefs of dependent-name 4093 // types, e.g., 4094 // typedef typename T::type T1; 4095 // typedef typename T1::type T2; 4096 if (const DependentNameType *DNT = T->getAs<DependentNameType>()) 4097 return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, DNT->getQualifier(), 4098 const_cast<IdentifierInfo *>(DNT->getIdentifier())); 4099 4100 // Otherwise, just canonicalize the type, and force it to be a TypeSpec. 4101 // FIXME: Why are TypeSpec and TypeSpecWithTemplate distinct in the 4102 // first place? 4103 return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, false, 4104 const_cast<Type*>(T.getTypePtr())); 4105 } 4106 4107 case NestedNameSpecifier::Global: 4108 // The global specifier is canonical and unique. 4109 return NNS; 4110 } 4111 4112 llvm_unreachable("Invalid NestedNameSpecifier::Kind!"); 4113} 4114 4115 4116const ArrayType *ASTContext::getAsArrayType(QualType T) const { 4117 // Handle the non-qualified case efficiently. 4118 if (!T.hasLocalQualifiers()) { 4119 // Handle the common positive case fast. 4120 if (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T)) 4121 return AT; 4122 } 4123 4124 // Handle the common negative case fast. 4125 if (!isa<ArrayType>(T.getCanonicalType())) 4126 return 0; 4127 4128 // Apply any qualifiers from the array type to the element type. This 4129 // implements C99 6.7.3p8: "If the specification of an array type includes 4130 // any type qualifiers, the element type is so qualified, not the array type." 4131 4132 // If we get here, we either have type qualifiers on the type, or we have 4133 // sugar such as a typedef in the way. If we have type qualifiers on the type 4134 // we must propagate them down into the element type. 4135 4136 SplitQualType split = T.getSplitDesugaredType(); 4137 Qualifiers qs = split.Quals; 4138 4139 // If we have a simple case, just return now. 4140 const ArrayType *ATy = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(split.Ty); 4141 if (ATy == 0 || qs.empty()) 4142 return ATy; 4143 4144 // Otherwise, we have an array and we have qualifiers on it. Push the 4145 // qualifiers into the array element type and return a new array type. 4146 QualType NewEltTy = getQualifiedType(ATy->getElementType(), qs); 4147 4148 if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(ATy)) 4149 return cast<ArrayType>(getConstantArrayType(NewEltTy, CAT->getSize(), 4150 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 4151 CAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers())); 4152 if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ATy)) 4153 return cast<ArrayType>(getIncompleteArrayType(NewEltTy, 4154 IAT->getSizeModifier(), 4155 IAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers())); 4156 4157 if (const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT 4158 = dyn_cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ATy)) 4159 return cast<ArrayType>( 4160 getDependentSizedArrayType(NewEltTy, 4161 DSAT->getSizeExpr(), 4162 DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 4163 DSAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), 4164 DSAT->getBracketsRange())); 4165 4166 const VariableArrayType *VAT = cast<VariableArrayType>(ATy); 4167 return cast<ArrayType>(getVariableArrayType(NewEltTy, 4168 VAT->getSizeExpr(), 4169 VAT->getSizeModifier(), 4170 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), 4171 VAT->getBracketsRange())); 4172} 4173 4174QualType ASTContext::getAdjustedParameterType(QualType T) const { 4175 if (T->isArrayType() || T->isFunctionType()) 4176 return getDecayedType(T); 4177 return T; 4178} 4179 4180QualType ASTContext::getSignatureParameterType(QualType T) const { 4181 T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T); 4182 T = getAdjustedParameterType(T); 4183 return T.getUnqualifiedType(); 4184} 4185 4186/// getArrayDecayedType - Return the properly qualified result of decaying the 4187/// specified array type to a pointer. This operation is non-trivial when 4188/// handling typedefs etc. The canonical type of "T" must be an array type, 4189/// this returns a pointer to a properly qualified element of the array. 4190/// 4191/// See C99 6.7.5.3p7 and C99 6.3.2.1p3. 4192QualType ASTContext::getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const { 4193 // Get the element type with 'getAsArrayType' so that we don't lose any 4194 // typedefs in the element type of the array. This also handles propagation 4195 // of type qualifiers from the array type into the element type if present 4196 // (C99 6.7.3p8). 4197 const ArrayType *PrettyArrayType = getAsArrayType(Ty); 4198 assert(PrettyArrayType && "Not an array type!"); 4199 4200 QualType PtrTy = getPointerType(PrettyArrayType->getElementType()); 4201 4202 // int x[restrict 4] -> int *restrict 4203 return getQualifiedType(PtrTy, PrettyArrayType->getIndexTypeQualifiers()); 4204} 4205 4206QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(const ArrayType *array) const { 4207 return getBaseElementType(array->getElementType()); 4208} 4209 4210QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(QualType type) const { 4211 Qualifiers qs; 4212 while (true) { 4213 SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType(); 4214 const ArrayType *array = split.Ty->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe(); 4215 if (!array) break; 4216 4217 type = array->getElementType(); 4218 qs.addConsistentQualifiers(split.Quals); 4219 } 4220 4221 return getQualifiedType(type, qs); 4222} 4223 4224/// getConstantArrayElementCount - Returns number of constant array elements. 4225uint64_t 4226ASTContext::getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType *CA) const { 4227 uint64_t ElementCount = 1; 4228 do { 4229 ElementCount *= CA->getSize().getZExtValue(); 4230 CA = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantArrayType>( 4231 CA->getElementType()->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe()); 4232 } while (CA); 4233 return ElementCount; 4234} 4235 4236/// getFloatingRank - Return a relative rank for floating point types. 4237/// This routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't a float. 4238static FloatingRank getFloatingRank(QualType T) { 4239 if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) 4240 return getFloatingRank(CT->getElementType()); 4241 4242 assert(T->getAs<BuiltinType>() && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type"); 4243 switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) { 4244 default: llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): not a floating type"); 4245 case BuiltinType::Half: return HalfRank; 4246 case BuiltinType::Float: return FloatRank; 4247 case BuiltinType::Double: return DoubleRank; 4248 case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return LongDoubleRank; 4249 } 4250} 4251 4252/// getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain - Returns a real floating 4253/// point or a complex type (based on typeDomain/typeSize). 4254/// 'typeDomain' is a real floating point or complex type. 4255/// 'typeSize' is a real floating point or complex type. 4256QualType ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size, 4257 QualType Domain) const { 4258 FloatingRank EltRank = getFloatingRank(Size); 4259 if (Domain->isComplexType()) { 4260 switch (EltRank) { 4261 case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Complex half is not supported"); 4262 case FloatRank: return FloatComplexTy; 4263 case DoubleRank: return DoubleComplexTy; 4264 case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleComplexTy; 4265 } 4266 } 4267 4268 assert(Domain->isRealFloatingType() && "Unknown domain!"); 4269 switch (EltRank) { 4270 case HalfRank: return HalfTy; 4271 case FloatRank: return FloatTy; 4272 case DoubleRank: return DoubleTy; 4273 case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleTy; 4274 } 4275 llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank"); 4276} 4277 4278/// getFloatingTypeOrder - Compare the rank of the two specified floating 4279/// point types, ignoring the domain of the type (i.e. 'double' == 4280/// '_Complex double'). If LHS > RHS, return 1. If LHS == RHS, return 0. If 4281/// LHS < RHS, return -1. 4282int ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const { 4283 FloatingRank LHSR = getFloatingRank(LHS); 4284 FloatingRank RHSR = getFloatingRank(RHS); 4285 4286 if (LHSR == RHSR) 4287 return 0; 4288 if (LHSR > RHSR) 4289 return 1; 4290 return -1; 4291} 4292 4293/// getIntegerRank - Return an integer conversion rank (C99 6.3.1.1p1). This 4294/// routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't an integer or enum, 4295/// or if it is not canonicalized. 4296unsigned ASTContext::getIntegerRank(const Type *T) const { 4297 assert(T->isCanonicalUnqualified() && "T should be canonicalized"); 4298 4299 switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) { 4300 default: llvm_unreachable("getIntegerRank(): not a built-in integer"); 4301 case BuiltinType::Bool: 4302 return 1 + (getIntWidth(BoolTy) << 3); 4303 case BuiltinType::Char_S: 4304 case BuiltinType::Char_U: 4305 case BuiltinType::SChar: 4306 case BuiltinType::UChar: 4307 return 2 + (getIntWidth(CharTy) << 3); 4308 case BuiltinType::Short: 4309 case BuiltinType::UShort: 4310 return 3 + (getIntWidth(ShortTy) << 3); 4311 case BuiltinType::Int: 4312 case BuiltinType::UInt: 4313 return 4 + (getIntWidth(IntTy) << 3); 4314 case BuiltinType::Long: 4315 case BuiltinType::ULong: 4316 return 5 + (getIntWidth(LongTy) << 3); 4317 case BuiltinType::LongLong: 4318 case BuiltinType::ULongLong: 4319 return 6 + (getIntWidth(LongLongTy) << 3); 4320 case BuiltinType::Int128: 4321 case BuiltinType::UInt128: 4322 return 7 + (getIntWidth(Int128Ty) << 3); 4323 } 4324} 4325 4326/// \brief Whether this is a promotable bitfield reference according 4327/// to C99 6.3.1.1p2, bullet 2 (and GCC extensions). 4328/// 4329/// \returns the type this bit-field will promote to, or NULL if no 4330/// promotion occurs. 4331QualType ASTContext::isPromotableBitField(Expr *E) const { 4332 if (E->isTypeDependent() || E->isValueDependent()) 4333 return QualType(); 4334 4335 FieldDecl *Field = E->getSourceBitField(); // FIXME: conditional bit-fields? 4336 if (!Field) 4337 return QualType(); 4338 4339 QualType FT = Field->getType(); 4340 4341 uint64_t BitWidth = Field->getBitWidthValue(*this); 4342 uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy); 4343 // GCC extension compatibility: if the bit-field size is less than or equal 4344 // to the size of int, it gets promoted no matter what its type is. 4345 // For instance, unsigned long bf : 4 gets promoted to signed int. 4346 if (BitWidth < IntSize) 4347 return IntTy; 4348 4349 if (BitWidth == IntSize) 4350 return FT->isSignedIntegerType() ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy; 4351 4352 // Types bigger than int are not subject to promotions, and therefore act 4353 // like the base type. 4354 // FIXME: This doesn't quite match what gcc does, but what gcc does here 4355 // is ridiculous. 4356 return QualType(); 4357} 4358 4359/// getPromotedIntegerType - Returns the type that Promotable will 4360/// promote to: C99 6.3.1.1p2, assuming that Promotable is a promotable 4361/// integer type. 4362QualType ASTContext::getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const { 4363 assert(!Promotable.isNull()); 4364 assert(Promotable->isPromotableIntegerType()); 4365 if (const EnumType *ET = Promotable->getAs<EnumType>()) 4366 return ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType(); 4367 4368 if (const BuiltinType *BT = Promotable->getAs<BuiltinType>()) { 4369 // C++ [conv.prom]: A prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, or wchar_t 4370 // (3.9.1) can be converted to a prvalue of the first of the following 4371 // types that can represent all the values of its underlying type: 4372 // int, unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or 4373 // unsigned long long int [...] 4374 // FIXME: Is there some better way to compute this? 4375 if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S || 4376 BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_U || 4377 BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char16 || 4378 BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char32) { 4379 bool FromIsSigned = BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S; 4380 uint64_t FromSize = getTypeSize(BT); 4381 QualType PromoteTypes[] = { IntTy, UnsignedIntTy, LongTy, UnsignedLongTy, 4382 LongLongTy, UnsignedLongLongTy }; 4383 for (size_t Idx = 0; Idx < llvm::array_lengthof(PromoteTypes); ++Idx) { 4384 uint64_t ToSize = getTypeSize(PromoteTypes[Idx]); 4385 if (FromSize < ToSize || 4386 (FromSize == ToSize && 4387 FromIsSigned == PromoteTypes[Idx]->isSignedIntegerType())) 4388 return PromoteTypes[Idx]; 4389 } 4390 llvm_unreachable("char type should fit into long long"); 4391 } 4392 } 4393 4394 // At this point, we should have a signed or unsigned integer type. 4395 if (Promotable->isSignedIntegerType()) 4396 return IntTy; 4397 uint64_t PromotableSize = getIntWidth(Promotable); 4398 uint64_t IntSize = getIntWidth(IntTy); 4399 assert(Promotable->isUnsignedIntegerType() && PromotableSize <= IntSize); 4400 return (PromotableSize != IntSize) ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy; 4401} 4402 4403/// \brief Recurses in pointer/array types until it finds an objc retainable 4404/// type and returns its ownership. 4405Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime ASTContext::getInnerObjCOwnership(QualType T) const { 4406 while (!T.isNull()) { 4407 if (T.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_None) 4408 return T.getObjCLifetime(); 4409 if (T->isArrayType()) 4410 T = getBaseElementType(T); 4411 else if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>()) 4412 T = PT->getPointeeType(); 4413 else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) 4414 T = RT->getPointeeType(); 4415 else 4416 break; 4417 } 4418 4419 return Qualifiers::OCL_None; 4420} 4421 4422static const Type *getIntegerTypeForEnum(const EnumType *ET) { 4423 // Incomplete enum types are not treated as integer types. 4424 // FIXME: In C++, enum types are never integer types. 4425 if (ET->getDecl()->isComplete() && !ET->getDecl()->isScoped()) 4426 return ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType().getTypePtr(); 4427 return NULL; 4428} 4429 4430/// getIntegerTypeOrder - Returns the highest ranked integer type: 4431/// C99 6.3.1.8p1. If LHS > RHS, return 1. If LHS == RHS, return 0. If 4432/// LHS < RHS, return -1. 4433int ASTContext::getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const { 4434 const Type *LHSC = getCanonicalType(LHS).getTypePtr(); 4435 const Type *RHSC = getCanonicalType(RHS).getTypePtr(); 4436 4437 // Unwrap enums to their underlying type. 4438 if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(LHSC)) 4439 LHSC = getIntegerTypeForEnum(ET); 4440 if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(RHSC)) 4441 RHSC = getIntegerTypeForEnum(ET); 4442 4443 if (LHSC == RHSC) return 0; 4444 4445 bool LHSUnsigned = LHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType(); 4446 bool RHSUnsigned = RHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType(); 4447 4448 unsigned LHSRank = getIntegerRank(LHSC); 4449 unsigned RHSRank = getIntegerRank(RHSC); 4450 4451 if (LHSUnsigned == RHSUnsigned) { // Both signed or both unsigned. 4452 if (LHSRank == RHSRank) return 0; 4453 return LHSRank > RHSRank ? 1 : -1; 4454 } 4455 4456 // Otherwise, the LHS is signed and the RHS is unsigned or visa versa. 4457 if (LHSUnsigned) { 4458 // If the unsigned [LHS] type is larger, return it. 4459 if (LHSRank >= RHSRank) 4460 return 1; 4461 4462 // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it 4463 // wins. Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are 4464 // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe. 4465 return -1; 4466 } 4467 4468 // If the unsigned [RHS] type is larger, return it. 4469 if (RHSRank >= LHSRank) 4470 return -1; 4471 4472 // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it 4473 // wins. Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are 4474 // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe. 4475 return 1; 4476} 4477 4478static RecordDecl * 4479CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext &Ctx, RecordDecl::TagKind TK, 4480 DeclContext *DC, IdentifierInfo *Id) { 4481 SourceLocation Loc; 4482 if (Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) 4483 return CXXRecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id); 4484 else 4485 return RecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id); 4486} 4487 4488// getCFConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant CFStrings. 4489QualType ASTContext::getCFConstantStringType() const { 4490 if (!CFConstantStringTypeDecl) { 4491 CFConstantStringTypeDecl = 4492 CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, 4493 &Idents.get("NSConstantString")); 4494 CFConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition(); 4495 4496 QualType FieldTypes[4]; 4497 4498 // const int *isa; 4499 FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst()); 4500 // int flags; 4501 FieldTypes[1] = IntTy; 4502 // const char *str; 4503 FieldTypes[2] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst()); 4504 // long length; 4505 FieldTypes[3] = LongTy; 4506 4507 // Create fields 4508 for (unsigned i = 0; i < 4; ++i) { 4509 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, CFConstantStringTypeDecl, 4510 SourceLocation(), 4511 SourceLocation(), 0, 4512 FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, 4513 /*BitWidth=*/0, 4514 /*Mutable=*/false, 4515 ICIS_NoInit); 4516 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 4517 CFConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field); 4518 } 4519 4520 CFConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition(); 4521 } 4522 4523 return getTagDeclType(CFConstantStringTypeDecl); 4524} 4525 4526QualType ASTContext::getObjCSuperType() const { 4527 if (ObjCSuperType.isNull()) { 4528 RecordDecl *ObjCSuperTypeDecl = 4529 CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, &Idents.get("objc_super")); 4530 TUDecl->addDecl(ObjCSuperTypeDecl); 4531 ObjCSuperType = getTagDeclType(ObjCSuperTypeDecl); 4532 } 4533 return ObjCSuperType; 4534} 4535 4536void ASTContext::setCFConstantStringType(QualType T) { 4537 const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>(); 4538 assert(Rec && "Invalid CFConstantStringType"); 4539 CFConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl(); 4540} 4541 4542QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorType() const { 4543 if (BlockDescriptorType) 4544 return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType); 4545 4546 RecordDecl *T; 4547 // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit. 4548 T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, 4549 &Idents.get("__block_descriptor")); 4550 T->startDefinition(); 4551 4552 QualType FieldTypes[] = { 4553 UnsignedLongTy, 4554 UnsignedLongTy, 4555 }; 4556 4557 static const char *const FieldNames[] = { 4558 "reserved", 4559 "Size" 4560 }; 4561 4562 for (size_t i = 0; i < 2; ++i) { 4563 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(), 4564 SourceLocation(), 4565 &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), 4566 FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, 4567 /*BitWidth=*/0, 4568 /*Mutable=*/false, 4569 ICIS_NoInit); 4570 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 4571 T->addDecl(Field); 4572 } 4573 4574 T->completeDefinition(); 4575 4576 BlockDescriptorType = T; 4577 4578 return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType); 4579} 4580 4581QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const { 4582 if (BlockDescriptorExtendedType) 4583 return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType); 4584 4585 RecordDecl *T; 4586 // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit. 4587 T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, 4588 &Idents.get("__block_descriptor_withcopydispose")); 4589 T->startDefinition(); 4590 4591 QualType FieldTypes[] = { 4592 UnsignedLongTy, 4593 UnsignedLongTy, 4594 getPointerType(VoidPtrTy), 4595 getPointerType(VoidPtrTy) 4596 }; 4597 4598 static const char *const FieldNames[] = { 4599 "reserved", 4600 "Size", 4601 "CopyFuncPtr", 4602 "DestroyFuncPtr" 4603 }; 4604 4605 for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) { 4606 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(), 4607 SourceLocation(), 4608 &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), 4609 FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, 4610 /*BitWidth=*/0, 4611 /*Mutable=*/false, 4612 ICIS_NoInit); 4613 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 4614 T->addDecl(Field); 4615 } 4616 4617 T->completeDefinition(); 4618 4619 BlockDescriptorExtendedType = T; 4620 4621 return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType); 4622} 4623 4624/// BlockRequiresCopying - Returns true if byref variable "D" of type "Ty" 4625/// requires copy/dispose. Note that this must match the logic 4626/// in buildByrefHelpers. 4627bool ASTContext::BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty, 4628 const VarDecl *D) { 4629 if (const CXXRecordDecl *record = Ty->getAsCXXRecordDecl()) { 4630 const Expr *copyExpr = getBlockVarCopyInits(D); 4631 if (!copyExpr && record->hasTrivialDestructor()) return false; 4632 4633 return true; 4634 } 4635 4636 if (!Ty->isObjCRetainableType()) return false; 4637 4638 Qualifiers qs = Ty.getQualifiers(); 4639 4640 // If we have lifetime, that dominates. 4641 if (Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime lifetime = qs.getObjCLifetime()) { 4642 assert(getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount); 4643 4644 switch (lifetime) { 4645 case Qualifiers::OCL_None: llvm_unreachable("impossible"); 4646 4647 // These are just bits as far as the runtime is concerned. 4648 case Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone: 4649 case Qualifiers::OCL_Autoreleasing: 4650 return false; 4651 4652 // Tell the runtime that this is ARC __weak, called by the 4653 // byref routines. 4654 case Qualifiers::OCL_Weak: 4655 // ARC __strong __block variables need to be retained. 4656 case Qualifiers::OCL_Strong: 4657 return true; 4658 } 4659 llvm_unreachable("fell out of lifetime switch!"); 4660 } 4661 return (Ty->isBlockPointerType() || isObjCNSObjectType(Ty) || 4662 Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType()); 4663} 4664 4665bool ASTContext::getByrefLifetime(QualType Ty, 4666 Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime &LifeTime, 4667 bool &HasByrefExtendedLayout) const { 4668 4669 if (!getLangOpts().ObjC1 || 4670 getLangOpts().getGC() != LangOptions::NonGC) 4671 return false; 4672 4673 HasByrefExtendedLayout = false; 4674 if (Ty->isRecordType()) { 4675 HasByrefExtendedLayout = true; 4676 LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_None; 4677 } 4678 else if (getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount) 4679 LifeTime = Ty.getObjCLifetime(); 4680 // MRR. 4681 else if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType()) 4682 LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone; 4683 else 4684 LifeTime = Qualifiers::OCL_None; 4685 return true; 4686} 4687 4688TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCInstanceTypeDecl() { 4689 if (!ObjCInstanceTypeDecl) 4690 ObjCInstanceTypeDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(*this, 4691 getTranslationUnitDecl(), 4692 SourceLocation(), 4693 SourceLocation(), 4694 &Idents.get("instancetype"), 4695 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(getObjCIdType())); 4696 return ObjCInstanceTypeDecl; 4697} 4698 4699// This returns true if a type has been typedefed to BOOL: 4700// typedef <type> BOOL; 4701static bool isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T) { 4702 if (const TypedefType *TT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(T)) 4703 if (IdentifierInfo *II = TT->getDecl()->getIdentifier()) 4704 return II->isStr("BOOL"); 4705 4706 return false; 4707} 4708 4709/// getObjCEncodingTypeSize returns size of type for objective-c encoding 4710/// purpose. 4711CharUnits ASTContext::getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const { 4712 if (!type->isIncompleteArrayType() && type->isIncompleteType()) 4713 return CharUnits::Zero(); 4714 4715 CharUnits sz = getTypeSizeInChars(type); 4716 4717 // Make all integer and enum types at least as large as an int 4718 if (sz.isPositive() && type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) 4719 sz = std::max(sz, getTypeSizeInChars(IntTy)); 4720 // Treat arrays as pointers, since that's how they're passed in. 4721 else if (type->isArrayType()) 4722 sz = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy); 4723 return sz; 4724} 4725 4726static inline 4727std::string charUnitsToString(const CharUnits &CU) { 4728 return llvm::itostr(CU.getQuantity()); 4729} 4730 4731/// getObjCEncodingForBlock - Return the encoded type for this block 4732/// declaration. 4733std::string ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr *Expr) const { 4734 std::string S; 4735 4736 const BlockDecl *Decl = Expr->getBlockDecl(); 4737 QualType BlockTy = 4738 Expr->getType()->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 4739 // Encode result type. 4740 if (getLangOpts().EncodeExtendedBlockSig) 4741 getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::OBJC_TQ_None, 4742 BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(), 4743 S, true /*Extended*/); 4744 else 4745 getObjCEncodingForType(BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(), 4746 S); 4747 // Compute size of all parameters. 4748 // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes. 4749 // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation! 4750 SourceLocation Loc; 4751 CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy); 4752 CharUnits ParmOffset = PtrSize; 4753 for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), 4754 E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { 4755 QualType PType = (*PI)->getType(); 4756 CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); 4757 if (sz.isZero()) 4758 continue; 4759 assert (sz.isPositive() && "BlockExpr - Incomplete param type"); 4760 ParmOffset += sz; 4761 } 4762 // Size of the argument frame 4763 S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); 4764 // Block pointer and offset. 4765 S += "@?0"; 4766 4767 // Argument types. 4768 ParmOffset = PtrSize; 4769 for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), E = 4770 Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { 4771 ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI; 4772 QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType(); 4773 if (const ArrayType *AT = 4774 dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) { 4775 // Use array's original type only if it has known number of 4776 // elements. 4777 if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) 4778 PType = PVDecl->getType(); 4779 } else if (PType->isFunctionType()) 4780 PType = PVDecl->getType(); 4781 if (getLangOpts().EncodeExtendedBlockSig) 4782 getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::OBJC_TQ_None, PType, 4783 S, true /*Extended*/); 4784 else 4785 getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S); 4786 S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); 4787 ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); 4788 } 4789 4790 return S; 4791} 4792 4793bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl *Decl, 4794 std::string& S) { 4795 // Encode result type. 4796 getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S); 4797 CharUnits ParmOffset; 4798 // Compute size of all parameters. 4799 for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), 4800 E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { 4801 QualType PType = (*PI)->getType(); 4802 CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); 4803 if (sz.isZero()) 4804 continue; 4805 4806 assert (sz.isPositive() && 4807 "getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl - Incomplete param type"); 4808 ParmOffset += sz; 4809 } 4810 S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); 4811 ParmOffset = CharUnits::Zero(); 4812 4813 // Argument types. 4814 for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), 4815 E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { 4816 ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI; 4817 QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType(); 4818 if (const ArrayType *AT = 4819 dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) { 4820 // Use array's original type only if it has known number of 4821 // elements. 4822 if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) 4823 PType = PVDecl->getType(); 4824 } else if (PType->isFunctionType()) 4825 PType = PVDecl->getType(); 4826 getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S); 4827 S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); 4828 ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); 4829 } 4830 4831 return false; 4832} 4833 4834/// getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter - Return the encoded type for a single 4835/// method parameter or return type. If Extended, include class names and 4836/// block object types. 4837void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT, 4838 QualType T, std::string& S, 4839 bool Extended) const { 4840 // Encode type qualifer, 'in', 'inout', etc. for the parameter. 4841 getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(QT, S); 4842 // Encode parameter type. 4843 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, 0, 4844 true /*OutermostType*/, 4845 false /*EncodingProperty*/, 4846 false /*StructField*/, 4847 Extended /*EncodeBlockParameters*/, 4848 Extended /*EncodeClassNames*/); 4849} 4850 4851/// getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Return the encoded type for this method 4852/// declaration. 4853bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl *Decl, 4854 std::string& S, 4855 bool Extended) const { 4856 // FIXME: This is not very efficient. 4857 // Encode return type. 4858 getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl->getObjCDeclQualifier(), 4859 Decl->getResultType(), S, Extended); 4860 // Compute size of all parameters. 4861 // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes. 4862 // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation! 4863 SourceLocation Loc; 4864 CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy); 4865 // The first two arguments (self and _cmd) are pointers; account for 4866 // their size. 4867 CharUnits ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize; 4868 for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), 4869 E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { 4870 QualType PType = (*PI)->getType(); 4871 CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); 4872 if (sz.isZero()) 4873 continue; 4874 4875 assert (sz.isPositive() && 4876 "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type"); 4877 ParmOffset += sz; 4878 } 4879 S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); 4880 S += "@0:"; 4881 S += charUnitsToString(PtrSize); 4882 4883 // Argument types. 4884 ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize; 4885 for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), 4886 E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { 4887 const ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI; 4888 QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType(); 4889 if (const ArrayType *AT = 4890 dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) { 4891 // Use array's original type only if it has known number of 4892 // elements. 4893 if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) 4894 PType = PVDecl->getType(); 4895 } else if (PType->isFunctionType()) 4896 PType = PVDecl->getType(); 4897 getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(PVDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier(), 4898 PType, S, Extended); 4899 S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); 4900 ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); 4901 } 4902 4903 return false; 4904} 4905 4906/// getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl - Return the encoded type for this 4907/// property declaration. If non-NULL, Container must be either an 4908/// ObjCCategoryImplDecl or ObjCImplementationDecl; it should only be 4909/// NULL when getting encodings for protocol properties. 4910/// Property attributes are stored as a comma-delimited C string. The simple 4911/// attributes readonly and bycopy are encoded as single characters. The 4912/// parametrized attributes, getter=name, setter=name, and ivar=name, are 4913/// encoded as single characters, followed by an identifier. Property types 4914/// are also encoded as a parametrized attribute. The characters used to encode 4915/// these attributes are defined by the following enumeration: 4916/// @code 4917/// enum PropertyAttributes { 4918/// kPropertyReadOnly = 'R', // property is read-only. 4919/// kPropertyBycopy = 'C', // property is a copy of the value last assigned 4920/// kPropertyByref = '&', // property is a reference to the value last assigned 4921/// kPropertyDynamic = 'D', // property is dynamic 4922/// kPropertyGetter = 'G', // followed by getter selector name 4923/// kPropertySetter = 'S', // followed by setter selector name 4924/// kPropertyInstanceVariable = 'V' // followed by instance variable name 4925/// kPropertyType = 'T' // followed by old-style type encoding. 4926/// kPropertyWeak = 'W' // 'weak' property 4927/// kPropertyStrong = 'P' // property GC'able 4928/// kPropertyNonAtomic = 'N' // property non-atomic 4929/// }; 4930/// @endcode 4931void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl *PD, 4932 const Decl *Container, 4933 std::string& S) const { 4934 // Collect information from the property implementation decl(s). 4935 bool Dynamic = false; 4936 ObjCPropertyImplDecl *SynthesizePID = 0; 4937 4938 // FIXME: Duplicated code due to poor abstraction. 4939 if (Container) { 4940 if (const ObjCCategoryImplDecl *CID = 4941 dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(Container)) { 4942 for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator 4943 i = CID->propimpl_begin(), e = CID->propimpl_end(); 4944 i != e; ++i) { 4945 ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i; 4946 if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) { 4947 if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) { 4948 Dynamic = true; 4949 } else { 4950 SynthesizePID = PID; 4951 } 4952 } 4953 } 4954 } else { 4955 const ObjCImplementationDecl *OID=cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(Container); 4956 for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator 4957 i = OID->propimpl_begin(), e = OID->propimpl_end(); 4958 i != e; ++i) { 4959 ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i; 4960 if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) { 4961 if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) { 4962 Dynamic = true; 4963 } else { 4964 SynthesizePID = PID; 4965 } 4966 } 4967 } 4968 } 4969 } 4970 4971 // FIXME: This is not very efficient. 4972 S = "T"; 4973 4974 // Encode result type. 4975 // GCC has some special rules regarding encoding of properties which 4976 // closely resembles encoding of ivars. 4977 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PD->getType(), S, true, true, 0, 4978 true /* outermost type */, 4979 true /* encoding for property */); 4980 4981 if (PD->isReadOnly()) { 4982 S += ",R"; 4983 if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_copy) 4984 S += ",C"; 4985 if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_retain) 4986 S += ",&"; 4987 } else { 4988 switch (PD->getSetterKind()) { 4989 case ObjCPropertyDecl::Assign: break; 4990 case ObjCPropertyDecl::Copy: S += ",C"; break; 4991 case ObjCPropertyDecl::Retain: S += ",&"; break; 4992 case ObjCPropertyDecl::Weak: S += ",W"; break; 4993 } 4994 } 4995 4996 // It really isn't clear at all what this means, since properties 4997 // are "dynamic by default". 4998 if (Dynamic) 4999 S += ",D"; 5000 5001 if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_nonatomic) 5002 S += ",N"; 5003 5004 if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_getter) { 5005 S += ",G"; 5006 S += PD->getGetterName().getAsString(); 5007 } 5008 5009 if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_setter) { 5010 S += ",S"; 5011 S += PD->getSetterName().getAsString(); 5012 } 5013 5014 if (SynthesizePID) { 5015 const ObjCIvarDecl *OID = SynthesizePID->getPropertyIvarDecl(); 5016 S += ",V"; 5017 S += OID->getNameAsString(); 5018 } 5019 5020 // FIXME: OBJCGC: weak & strong 5021} 5022 5023/// getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding - 5024/// Another legacy compatibility encoding: 32-bit longs are encoded as 5025/// 'l' or 'L' , but not always. For typedefs, we need to use 5026/// 'i' or 'I' instead if encoding a struct field, or a pointer! 5027/// 5028void ASTContext::getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding (QualType &PointeeTy) const { 5029 if (isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) { 5030 if (const BuiltinType *BT = PointeeTy->getAs<BuiltinType>()) { 5031 if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::ULong && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32) 5032 PointeeTy = UnsignedIntTy; 5033 else 5034 if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Long && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32) 5035 PointeeTy = IntTy; 5036 } 5037 } 5038} 5039 5040void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T, std::string& S, 5041 const FieldDecl *Field) const { 5042 // We follow the behavior of gcc, expanding structures which are 5043 // directly pointed to, and expanding embedded structures. Note that 5044 // these rules are sufficient to prevent recursive encoding of the 5045 // same type. 5046 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, Field, 5047 true /* outermost type */); 5048} 5049 5050static char getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext *C, 5051 BuiltinType::Kind kind) { 5052 switch (kind) { 5053 case BuiltinType::Void: return 'v'; 5054 case BuiltinType::Bool: return 'B'; 5055 case BuiltinType::Char_U: 5056 case BuiltinType::UChar: return 'C'; 5057 case BuiltinType::Char16: 5058 case BuiltinType::UShort: return 'S'; 5059 case BuiltinType::Char32: 5060 case BuiltinType::UInt: return 'I'; 5061 case BuiltinType::ULong: 5062 return C->getTargetInfo().getLongWidth() == 32 ? 'L' : 'Q'; 5063 case BuiltinType::UInt128: return 'T'; 5064 case BuiltinType::ULongLong: return 'Q'; 5065 case BuiltinType::Char_S: 5066 case BuiltinType::SChar: return 'c'; 5067 case BuiltinType::Short: return 's'; 5068 case BuiltinType::WChar_S: 5069 case BuiltinType::WChar_U: 5070 case BuiltinType::Int: return 'i'; 5071 case BuiltinType::Long: 5072 return C->getTargetInfo().getLongWidth() == 32 ? 'l' : 'q'; 5073 case BuiltinType::LongLong: return 'q'; 5074 case BuiltinType::Int128: return 't'; 5075 case BuiltinType::Float: return 'f'; 5076 case BuiltinType::Double: return 'd'; 5077 case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return 'D'; 5078 case BuiltinType::NullPtr: return '*'; // like char* 5079 5080 case BuiltinType::Half: 5081 // FIXME: potentially need @encodes for these! 5082 return ' '; 5083 5084 case BuiltinType::ObjCId: 5085 case BuiltinType::ObjCClass: 5086 case BuiltinType::ObjCSel: 5087 llvm_unreachable("@encoding ObjC primitive type"); 5088 5089 // OpenCL and placeholder types don't need @encodings. 5090 case BuiltinType::OCLImage1d: 5091 case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dArray: 5092 case BuiltinType::OCLImage1dBuffer: 5093 case BuiltinType::OCLImage2d: 5094 case BuiltinType::OCLImage2dArray: 5095 case BuiltinType::OCLImage3d: 5096 case BuiltinType::OCLEvent: 5097 case BuiltinType::OCLSampler: 5098 case BuiltinType::Dependent: 5099#define BUILTIN_TYPE(KIND, ID) 5100#define PLACEHOLDER_TYPE(KIND, ID) \ 5101 case BuiltinType::KIND: 5102#include "clang/AST/BuiltinTypes.def" 5103 llvm_unreachable("invalid builtin type for @encode"); 5104 } 5105 llvm_unreachable("invalid BuiltinType::Kind value"); 5106} 5107 5108static char ObjCEncodingForEnumType(const ASTContext *C, const EnumType *ET) { 5109 EnumDecl *Enum = ET->getDecl(); 5110 5111 // The encoding of an non-fixed enum type is always 'i', regardless of size. 5112 if (!Enum->isFixed()) 5113 return 'i'; 5114 5115 // The encoding of a fixed enum type matches its fixed underlying type. 5116 const BuiltinType *BT = Enum->getIntegerType()->castAs<BuiltinType>(); 5117 return getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(C, BT->getKind()); 5118} 5119 5120static void EncodeBitField(const ASTContext *Ctx, std::string& S, 5121 QualType T, const FieldDecl *FD) { 5122 assert(FD->isBitField() && "not a bitfield - getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl"); 5123 S += 'b'; 5124 // The NeXT runtime encodes bit fields as b followed by the number of bits. 5125 // The GNU runtime requires more information; bitfields are encoded as b, 5126 // then the offset (in bits) of the first element, then the type of the 5127 // bitfield, then the size in bits. For example, in this structure: 5128 // 5129 // struct 5130 // { 5131 // int integer; 5132 // int flags:2; 5133 // }; 5134 // On a 32-bit system, the encoding for flags would be b2 for the NeXT 5135 // runtime, but b32i2 for the GNU runtime. The reason for this extra 5136 // information is not especially sensible, but we're stuck with it for 5137 // compatibility with GCC, although providing it breaks anything that 5138 // actually uses runtime introspection and wants to work on both runtimes... 5139 if (Ctx->getLangOpts().ObjCRuntime.isGNUFamily()) { 5140 const RecordDecl *RD = FD->getParent(); 5141 const ASTRecordLayout &RL = Ctx->getASTRecordLayout(RD); 5142 S += llvm::utostr(RL.getFieldOffset(FD->getFieldIndex())); 5143 if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>()) 5144 S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(Ctx, ET); 5145 else { 5146 const BuiltinType *BT = T->castAs<BuiltinType>(); 5147 S += getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(Ctx, BT->getKind()); 5148 } 5149 } 5150 S += llvm::utostr(FD->getBitWidthValue(*Ctx)); 5151} 5152 5153// FIXME: Use SmallString for accumulating string. 5154void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T, std::string& S, 5155 bool ExpandPointedToStructures, 5156 bool ExpandStructures, 5157 const FieldDecl *FD, 5158 bool OutermostType, 5159 bool EncodingProperty, 5160 bool StructField, 5161 bool EncodeBlockParameters, 5162 bool EncodeClassNames, 5163 bool EncodePointerToObjCTypedef) const { 5164 CanQualType CT = getCanonicalType(T); 5165 switch (CT->getTypeClass()) { 5166 case Type::Builtin: 5167 case Type::Enum: 5168 if (FD && FD->isBitField()) 5169 return EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD); 5170 if (const BuiltinType *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CT)) 5171 S += getObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(this, BT->getKind()); 5172 else 5173 S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(this, cast<EnumType>(CT)); 5174 return; 5175 5176 case Type::Complex: { 5177 const ComplexType *CT = T->castAs<ComplexType>(); 5178 S += 'j'; 5179 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(CT->getElementType(), S, false, false, 0, false, 5180 false); 5181 return; 5182 } 5183 5184 case Type::Atomic: { 5185 const AtomicType *AT = T->castAs<AtomicType>(); 5186 S += 'A'; 5187 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getValueType(), S, false, false, 0, 5188 false, false); 5189 return; 5190 } 5191 5192 // encoding for pointer or reference types. 5193 case Type::Pointer: 5194 case Type::LValueReference: 5195 case Type::RValueReference: { 5196 QualType PointeeTy; 5197 if (isa<PointerType>(CT)) { 5198 const PointerType *PT = T->castAs<PointerType>(); 5199 if (PT->isObjCSelType()) { 5200 S += ':'; 5201 return; 5202 } 5203 PointeeTy = PT->getPointeeType(); 5204 } else { 5205 PointeeTy = T->castAs<ReferenceType>()->getPointeeType(); 5206 } 5207 5208 bool isReadOnly = false; 5209 // For historical/compatibility reasons, the read-only qualifier of the 5210 // pointee gets emitted _before_ the '^'. The read-only qualifier of 5211 // the pointer itself gets ignored, _unless_ we are looking at a typedef! 5212 // Also, do not emit the 'r' for anything but the outermost type! 5213 if (isa<TypedefType>(T.getTypePtr())) { 5214 if (OutermostType && T.isConstQualified()) { 5215 isReadOnly = true; 5216 S += 'r'; 5217 } 5218 } else if (OutermostType) { 5219 QualType P = PointeeTy; 5220 while (P->getAs<PointerType>()) 5221 P = P->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 5222 if (P.isConstQualified()) { 5223 isReadOnly = true; 5224 S += 'r'; 5225 } 5226 } 5227 if (isReadOnly) { 5228 // Another legacy compatibility encoding. Some ObjC qualifier and type 5229 // combinations need to be rearranged. 5230 // Rewrite "in const" from "nr" to "rn" 5231 if (StringRef(S).endswith("nr")) 5232 S.replace(S.end()-2, S.end(), "rn"); 5233 } 5234 5235 if (PointeeTy->isCharType()) { 5236 // char pointer types should be encoded as '*' unless it is a 5237 // type that has been typedef'd to 'BOOL'. 5238 if (!isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(PointeeTy)) { 5239 S += '*'; 5240 return; 5241 } 5242 } else if (const RecordType *RTy = PointeeTy->getAs<RecordType>()) { 5243 // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_class *" to "#". 5244 if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_class")) { 5245 S += '#'; 5246 return; 5247 } 5248 // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_object *" to "@". 5249 if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_object")) { 5250 S += '@'; 5251 return; 5252 } 5253 // fall through... 5254 } 5255 S += '^'; 5256 getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(PointeeTy); 5257 5258 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, false, ExpandPointedToStructures, 5259 NULL); 5260 return; 5261 } 5262 5263 case Type::ConstantArray: 5264 case Type::IncompleteArray: 5265 case Type::VariableArray: { 5266 const ArrayType *AT = cast<ArrayType>(CT); 5267 5268 if (isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT) && !StructField) { 5269 // Incomplete arrays are encoded as a pointer to the array element. 5270 S += '^'; 5271 5272 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S, 5273 false, ExpandStructures, FD); 5274 } else { 5275 S += '['; 5276 5277 if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) 5278 S += llvm::utostr(CAT->getSize().getZExtValue()); 5279 else { 5280 //Variable length arrays are encoded as a regular array with 0 elements. 5281 assert((isa<VariableArrayType>(AT) || isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) && 5282 "Unknown array type!"); 5283 S += '0'; 5284 } 5285 5286 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S, 5287 false, ExpandStructures, FD); 5288 S += ']'; 5289 } 5290 return; 5291 } 5292 5293 case Type::FunctionNoProto: 5294 case Type::FunctionProto: 5295 S += '?'; 5296 return; 5297 5298 case Type::Record: { 5299 RecordDecl *RDecl = cast<RecordType>(CT)->getDecl(); 5300 S += RDecl->isUnion() ? '(' : '{'; 5301 // Anonymous structures print as '?' 5302 if (const IdentifierInfo *II = RDecl->getIdentifier()) { 5303 S += II->getName(); 5304 if (ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *Spec 5305 = dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RDecl)) { 5306 const TemplateArgumentList &TemplateArgs = Spec->getTemplateArgs(); 5307 llvm::raw_string_ostream OS(S); 5308 TemplateSpecializationType::PrintTemplateArgumentList(OS, 5309 TemplateArgs.data(), 5310 TemplateArgs.size(), 5311 (*this).getPrintingPolicy()); 5312 } 5313 } else { 5314 S += '?'; 5315 } 5316 if (ExpandStructures) { 5317 S += '='; 5318 if (!RDecl->isUnion()) { 5319 getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RDecl, S, FD); 5320 } else { 5321 for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(), 5322 FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end(); 5323 Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) { 5324 if (FD) { 5325 S += '"'; 5326 S += Field->getNameAsString(); 5327 S += '"'; 5328 } 5329 5330 // Special case bit-fields. 5331 if (Field->isBitField()) { 5332 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, 5333 *Field); 5334 } else { 5335 QualType qt = Field->getType(); 5336 getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt); 5337 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, 5338 FD, /*OutermostType*/false, 5339 /*EncodingProperty*/false, 5340 /*StructField*/true); 5341 } 5342 } 5343 } 5344 } 5345 S += RDecl->isUnion() ? ')' : '}'; 5346 return; 5347 } 5348 5349 case Type::BlockPointer: { 5350 const BlockPointerType *BT = T->castAs<BlockPointerType>(); 5351 S += "@?"; // Unlike a pointer-to-function, which is "^?". 5352 if (EncodeBlockParameters) { 5353 const FunctionType *FT = BT->getPointeeType()->castAs<FunctionType>(); 5354 5355 S += '<'; 5356 // Block return type 5357 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(FT->getResultType(), S, 5358 ExpandPointedToStructures, ExpandStructures, 5359 FD, 5360 false /* OutermostType */, 5361 EncodingProperty, 5362 false /* StructField */, 5363 EncodeBlockParameters, 5364 EncodeClassNames); 5365 // Block self 5366 S += "@?"; 5367 // Block parameters 5368 if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(FT)) { 5369 for (FunctionProtoType::arg_type_iterator I = FPT->arg_type_begin(), 5370 E = FPT->arg_type_end(); I && (I != E); ++I) { 5371 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(*I, S, 5372 ExpandPointedToStructures, 5373 ExpandStructures, 5374 FD, 5375 false /* OutermostType */, 5376 EncodingProperty, 5377 false /* StructField */, 5378 EncodeBlockParameters, 5379 EncodeClassNames); 5380 } 5381 } 5382 S += '>'; 5383 } 5384 return; 5385 } 5386 5387 case Type::ObjCObject: 5388 case Type::ObjCInterface: { 5389 // Ignore protocol qualifiers when mangling at this level. 5390 T = T->castAs<ObjCObjectType>()->getBaseType(); 5391 5392 // The assumption seems to be that this assert will succeed 5393 // because nested levels will have filtered out 'id' and 'Class'. 5394 const ObjCInterfaceType *OIT = T->castAs<ObjCInterfaceType>(); 5395 // @encode(class_name) 5396 ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OIT->getDecl(); 5397 S += '{'; 5398 const IdentifierInfo *II = OI->getIdentifier(); 5399 S += II->getName(); 5400 S += '='; 5401 SmallVector<const ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars; 5402 DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars); 5403 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) { 5404 const FieldDecl *Field = cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]); 5405 if (Field->isBitField()) 5406 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, Field); 5407 else 5408 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, FD, 5409 false, false, false, false, false, 5410 EncodePointerToObjCTypedef); 5411 } 5412 S += '}'; 5413 return; 5414 } 5415 5416 case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: { 5417 const ObjCObjectPointerType *OPT = T->castAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); 5418 if (OPT->isObjCIdType()) { 5419 S += '@'; 5420 return; 5421 } 5422 5423 if (OPT->isObjCClassType() || OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType()) { 5424 // FIXME: Consider if we need to output qualifiers for 'Class<p>'. 5425 // Since this is a binary compatibility issue, need to consult with runtime 5426 // folks. Fortunately, this is a *very* obsure construct. 5427 S += '#'; 5428 return; 5429 } 5430 5431 if (OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) { 5432 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(getObjCIdType(), S, 5433 ExpandPointedToStructures, 5434 ExpandStructures, FD); 5435 if (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames) { 5436 // Note that we do extended encoding of protocol qualifer list 5437 // Only when doing ivar or property encoding. 5438 S += '"'; 5439 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(), 5440 E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { 5441 S += '<'; 5442 S += (*I)->getNameAsString(); 5443 S += '>'; 5444 } 5445 S += '"'; 5446 } 5447 return; 5448 } 5449 5450 QualType PointeeTy = OPT->getPointeeType(); 5451 if (!EncodingProperty && 5452 isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr()) && 5453 !EncodePointerToObjCTypedef) { 5454 // Another historical/compatibility reason. 5455 // We encode the underlying type which comes out as 5456 // {...}; 5457 S += '^'; 5458 if (FD && OPT->getInterfaceDecl()) { 5459 // Prevent recursive encoding of fields in some rare cases. 5460 ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OPT->getInterfaceDecl(); 5461 SmallVector<const ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars; 5462 DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars); 5463 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) { 5464 if (cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]) == FD) { 5465 S += '{'; 5466 S += OI->getIdentifier()->getName(); 5467 S += '}'; 5468 return; 5469 } 5470 } 5471 } 5472 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, 5473 false, ExpandPointedToStructures, 5474 NULL, 5475 false, false, false, false, false, 5476 /*EncodePointerToObjCTypedef*/true); 5477 return; 5478 } 5479 5480 S += '@'; 5481 if (OPT->getInterfaceDecl() && 5482 (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames)) { 5483 S += '"'; 5484 S += OPT->getInterfaceDecl()->getIdentifier()->getName(); 5485 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(), 5486 E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { 5487 S += '<'; 5488 S += (*I)->getNameAsString(); 5489 S += '>'; 5490 } 5491 S += '"'; 5492 } 5493 return; 5494 } 5495 5496 // gcc just blithely ignores member pointers. 5497 // FIXME: we shoul do better than that. 'M' is available. 5498 case Type::MemberPointer: 5499 return; 5500 5501 case Type::Vector: 5502 case Type::ExtVector: 5503 // This matches gcc's encoding, even though technically it is 5504 // insufficient. 5505 // FIXME. We should do a better job than gcc. 5506 return; 5507 5508 case Type::Auto: 5509 // We could see an undeduced auto type here during error recovery. 5510 // Just ignore it. 5511 return; 5512 5513#define ABSTRACT_TYPE(KIND, BASE) 5514#define TYPE(KIND, BASE) 5515#define DEPENDENT_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \ 5516 case Type::KIND: 5517#define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \ 5518 case Type::KIND: 5519#define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(KIND, BASE) \ 5520 case Type::KIND: 5521#include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" 5522 llvm_unreachable("@encode for dependent type!"); 5523 } 5524 llvm_unreachable("bad type kind!"); 5525} 5526 5527void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RecordDecl *RDecl, 5528 std::string &S, 5529 const FieldDecl *FD, 5530 bool includeVBases) const { 5531 assert(RDecl && "Expected non-null RecordDecl"); 5532 assert(!RDecl->isUnion() && "Should not be called for unions"); 5533 if (!RDecl->getDefinition()) 5534 return; 5535 5536 CXXRecordDecl *CXXRec = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RDecl); 5537 std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *> FieldOrBaseOffsets; 5538 const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RDecl); 5539 5540 if (CXXRec) { 5541 for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator 5542 BI = CXXRec->bases_begin(), 5543 BE = CXXRec->bases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) { 5544 if (!BI->isVirtual()) { 5545 CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl(); 5546 if (base->isEmpty()) 5547 continue; 5548 uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getBaseClassOffset(base)); 5549 FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs), 5550 std::make_pair(offs, base)); 5551 } 5552 } 5553 } 5554 5555 unsigned i = 0; 5556 for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(), 5557 FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end(); 5558 Field != FieldEnd; ++Field, ++i) { 5559 uint64_t offs = layout.getFieldOffset(i); 5560 FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs), 5561 std::make_pair(offs, *Field)); 5562 } 5563 5564 if (CXXRec && includeVBases) { 5565 for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator 5566 BI = CXXRec->vbases_begin(), 5567 BE = CXXRec->vbases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) { 5568 CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl(); 5569 if (base->isEmpty()) 5570 continue; 5571 uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getVBaseClassOffset(base)); 5572 if (offs >= uint64_t(toBits(layout.getNonVirtualSize())) && 5573 FieldOrBaseOffsets.find(offs) == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end()) 5574 FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(), 5575 std::make_pair(offs, base)); 5576 } 5577 } 5578 5579 CharUnits size; 5580 if (CXXRec) { 5581 size = includeVBases ? layout.getSize() : layout.getNonVirtualSize(); 5582 } else { 5583 size = layout.getSize(); 5584 } 5585 5586 uint64_t CurOffs = 0; 5587 std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *>::iterator 5588 CurLayObj = FieldOrBaseOffsets.begin(); 5589 5590 if (CXXRec && CXXRec->isDynamicClass() && 5591 (CurLayObj == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end() || CurLayObj->first != 0)) { 5592 if (FD) { 5593 S += "\"_vptr$"; 5594 std::string recname = CXXRec->getNameAsString(); 5595 if (recname.empty()) recname = "?"; 5596 S += recname; 5597 S += '"'; 5598 } 5599 S += "^^?"; 5600 CurOffs += getTypeSize(VoidPtrTy); 5601 } 5602 5603 if (!RDecl->hasFlexibleArrayMember()) { 5604 // Mark the end of the structure. 5605 uint64_t offs = toBits(size); 5606 FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs), 5607 std::make_pair(offs, (NamedDecl*)0)); 5608 } 5609 5610 for (; CurLayObj != FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(); ++CurLayObj) { 5611 assert(CurOffs <= CurLayObj->first); 5612 5613 if (CurOffs < CurLayObj->first) { 5614 uint64_t padding = CurLayObj->first - CurOffs; 5615 // FIXME: There doesn't seem to be a way to indicate in the encoding that 5616 // packing/alignment of members is different that normal, in which case 5617 // the encoding will be out-of-sync with the real layout. 5618 // If the runtime switches to just consider the size of types without 5619 // taking into account alignment, we could make padding explicit in the 5620 // encoding (e.g. using arrays of chars). The encoding strings would be 5621 // longer then though. 5622 CurOffs += padding; 5623 } 5624 5625 NamedDecl *dcl = CurLayObj->second; 5626 if (dcl == 0) 5627 break; // reached end of structure. 5628 5629 if (CXXRecordDecl *base = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(dcl)) { 5630 // We expand the bases without their virtual bases since those are going 5631 // in the initial structure. Note that this differs from gcc which 5632 // expands virtual bases each time one is encountered in the hierarchy, 5633 // making the encoding type bigger than it really is. 5634 getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(base, S, FD, /*includeVBases*/false); 5635 assert(!base->isEmpty()); 5636 CurOffs += toBits(getASTRecordLayout(base).getNonVirtualSize()); 5637 } else { 5638 FieldDecl *field = cast<FieldDecl>(dcl); 5639 if (FD) { 5640 S += '"'; 5641 S += field->getNameAsString(); 5642 S += '"'; 5643 } 5644 5645 if (field->isBitField()) { 5646 EncodeBitField(this, S, field->getType(), field); 5647 CurOffs += field->getBitWidthValue(*this); 5648 } else { 5649 QualType qt = field->getType(); 5650 getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt); 5651 getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, FD, 5652 /*OutermostType*/false, 5653 /*EncodingProperty*/false, 5654 /*StructField*/true); 5655 CurOffs += getTypeSize(field->getType()); 5656 } 5657 } 5658 } 5659} 5660 5661void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT, 5662 std::string& S) const { 5663 if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_In) 5664 S += 'n'; 5665 if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Inout) 5666 S += 'N'; 5667 if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Out) 5668 S += 'o'; 5669 if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Bycopy) 5670 S += 'O'; 5671 if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Byref) 5672 S += 'R'; 5673 if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Oneway) 5674 S += 'V'; 5675} 5676 5677TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCIdDecl() const { 5678 if (!ObjCIdDecl) { 5679 QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, 0, 0); 5680 T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T); 5681 TypeSourceInfo *IdInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T); 5682 ObjCIdDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), 5683 getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5684 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5685 &Idents.get("id"), IdInfo); 5686 } 5687 5688 return ObjCIdDecl; 5689} 5690 5691TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCSelDecl() const { 5692 if (!ObjCSelDecl) { 5693 QualType SelT = getPointerType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy); 5694 TypeSourceInfo *SelInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(SelT); 5695 ObjCSelDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), 5696 getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5697 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5698 &Idents.get("SEL"), SelInfo); 5699 } 5700 return ObjCSelDecl; 5701} 5702 5703TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCClassDecl() const { 5704 if (!ObjCClassDecl) { 5705 QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, 0, 0); 5706 T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T); 5707 TypeSourceInfo *ClassInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T); 5708 ObjCClassDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), 5709 getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5710 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5711 &Idents.get("Class"), ClassInfo); 5712 } 5713 5714 return ObjCClassDecl; 5715} 5716 5717ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjCProtocolDecl() const { 5718 if (!ObjCProtocolClassDecl) { 5719 ObjCProtocolClassDecl 5720 = ObjCInterfaceDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5721 SourceLocation(), 5722 &Idents.get("Protocol"), 5723 /*PrevDecl=*/0, 5724 SourceLocation(), true); 5725 } 5726 5727 return ObjCProtocolClassDecl; 5728} 5729 5730//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 5731// __builtin_va_list Construction Functions 5732//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 5733 5734static TypedefDecl *CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 5735 // typedef char* __builtin_va_list; 5736 QualType CharPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->CharTy); 5737 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo 5738 = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(CharPtrType); 5739 5740 TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl 5741 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5742 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5743 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5744 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 5745 TInfo); 5746 return VaListTypeDecl; 5747} 5748 5749static TypedefDecl *CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 5750 // typedef void* __builtin_va_list; 5751 QualType VoidPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5752 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo 5753 = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VoidPtrType); 5754 5755 TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl 5756 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5757 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5758 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5759 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 5760 TInfo); 5761 return VaListTypeDecl; 5762} 5763 5764static TypedefDecl * 5765CreateAArch64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 5766 RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl; 5767 if (Context->getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) { 5768 // namespace std { struct __va_list { 5769 NamespaceDecl *NS; 5770 NS = NamespaceDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5771 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5772 /*Inline*/false, SourceLocation(), 5773 SourceLocation(), &Context->Idents.get("std"), 5774 /*PrevDecl*/0); 5775 5776 VaListTagDecl = CXXRecordDecl::Create(*Context, TTK_Struct, 5777 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5778 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5779 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list")); 5780 VaListTagDecl->setDeclContext(NS); 5781 } else { 5782 // struct __va_list 5783 VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct, 5784 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5785 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list")); 5786 } 5787 5788 VaListTagDecl->startDefinition(); 5789 5790 const size_t NumFields = 5; 5791 QualType FieldTypes[NumFields]; 5792 const char *FieldNames[NumFields]; 5793 5794 // void *__stack; 5795 FieldTypes[0] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5796 FieldNames[0] = "__stack"; 5797 5798 // void *__gr_top; 5799 FieldTypes[1] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5800 FieldNames[1] = "__gr_top"; 5801 5802 // void *__vr_top; 5803 FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5804 FieldNames[2] = "__vr_top"; 5805 5806 // int __gr_offs; 5807 FieldTypes[3] = Context->IntTy; 5808 FieldNames[3] = "__gr_offs"; 5809 5810 // int __vr_offs; 5811 FieldTypes[4] = Context->IntTy; 5812 FieldNames[4] = "__vr_offs"; 5813 5814 // Create fields 5815 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) { 5816 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5817 VaListTagDecl, 5818 SourceLocation(), 5819 SourceLocation(), 5820 &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), 5821 FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, 5822 /*BitWidth=*/0, 5823 /*Mutable=*/false, 5824 ICIS_NoInit); 5825 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 5826 VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field); 5827 } 5828 VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition(); 5829 QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl); 5830 Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType; 5831 5832 // } __builtin_va_list; 5833 TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl 5834 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5835 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5836 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5837 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 5838 Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType)); 5839 5840 return VaListTypedefDecl; 5841} 5842 5843static TypedefDecl *CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 5844 // typedef struct __va_list_tag { 5845 RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl; 5846 5847 VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct, 5848 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5849 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag")); 5850 VaListTagDecl->startDefinition(); 5851 5852 const size_t NumFields = 5; 5853 QualType FieldTypes[NumFields]; 5854 const char *FieldNames[NumFields]; 5855 5856 // unsigned char gpr; 5857 FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedCharTy; 5858 FieldNames[0] = "gpr"; 5859 5860 // unsigned char fpr; 5861 FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedCharTy; 5862 FieldNames[1] = "fpr"; 5863 5864 // unsigned short reserved; 5865 FieldTypes[2] = Context->UnsignedShortTy; 5866 FieldNames[2] = "reserved"; 5867 5868 // void* overflow_arg_area; 5869 FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5870 FieldNames[3] = "overflow_arg_area"; 5871 5872 // void* reg_save_area; 5873 FieldTypes[4] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5874 FieldNames[4] = "reg_save_area"; 5875 5876 // Create fields 5877 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) { 5878 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*Context, VaListTagDecl, 5879 SourceLocation(), 5880 SourceLocation(), 5881 &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), 5882 FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, 5883 /*BitWidth=*/0, 5884 /*Mutable=*/false, 5885 ICIS_NoInit); 5886 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 5887 VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field); 5888 } 5889 VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition(); 5890 QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl); 5891 Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType; 5892 5893 // } __va_list_tag; 5894 TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl 5895 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5896 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5897 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5898 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"), 5899 Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType)); 5900 QualType VaListTagTypedefType = 5901 Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl); 5902 5903 // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1]; 5904 llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1); 5905 QualType VaListTagArrayType 5906 = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType, 5907 Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0); 5908 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo 5909 = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType); 5910 TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl 5911 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5912 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5913 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5914 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 5915 TInfo); 5916 5917 return VaListTypedefDecl; 5918} 5919 5920static TypedefDecl * 5921CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 5922 // typedef struct __va_list_tag { 5923 RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl; 5924 VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct, 5925 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5926 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag")); 5927 VaListTagDecl->startDefinition(); 5928 5929 const size_t NumFields = 4; 5930 QualType FieldTypes[NumFields]; 5931 const char *FieldNames[NumFields]; 5932 5933 // unsigned gp_offset; 5934 FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedIntTy; 5935 FieldNames[0] = "gp_offset"; 5936 5937 // unsigned fp_offset; 5938 FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedIntTy; 5939 FieldNames[1] = "fp_offset"; 5940 5941 // void* overflow_arg_area; 5942 FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5943 FieldNames[2] = "overflow_arg_area"; 5944 5945 // void* reg_save_area; 5946 FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 5947 FieldNames[3] = "reg_save_area"; 5948 5949 // Create fields 5950 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) { 5951 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5952 VaListTagDecl, 5953 SourceLocation(), 5954 SourceLocation(), 5955 &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), 5956 FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, 5957 /*BitWidth=*/0, 5958 /*Mutable=*/false, 5959 ICIS_NoInit); 5960 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 5961 VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field); 5962 } 5963 VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition(); 5964 QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl); 5965 Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType; 5966 5967 // } __va_list_tag; 5968 TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl 5969 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5970 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5971 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5972 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"), 5973 Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType)); 5974 QualType VaListTagTypedefType = 5975 Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl); 5976 5977 // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1]; 5978 llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1); 5979 QualType VaListTagArrayType 5980 = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType, 5981 Size, ArrayType::Normal,0); 5982 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo 5983 = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType); 5984 TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl 5985 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 5986 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 5987 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 5988 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 5989 TInfo); 5990 5991 return VaListTypedefDecl; 5992} 5993 5994static TypedefDecl *CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 5995 // typedef int __builtin_va_list[4]; 5996 llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 4); 5997 QualType IntArrayType 5998 = Context->getConstantArrayType(Context->IntTy, 5999 Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0); 6000 TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl 6001 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 6002 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6003 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 6004 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 6005 Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(IntArrayType)); 6006 6007 return VaListTypedefDecl; 6008} 6009 6010static TypedefDecl * 6011CreateAAPCSABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 6012 RecordDecl *VaListDecl; 6013 if (Context->getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) { 6014 // namespace std { struct __va_list { 6015 NamespaceDecl *NS; 6016 NS = NamespaceDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 6017 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6018 /*Inline*/false, SourceLocation(), 6019 SourceLocation(), &Context->Idents.get("std"), 6020 /*PrevDecl*/0); 6021 6022 VaListDecl = CXXRecordDecl::Create(*Context, TTK_Struct, 6023 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6024 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 6025 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list")); 6026 6027 VaListDecl->setDeclContext(NS); 6028 6029 } else { 6030 // struct __va_list { 6031 VaListDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct, 6032 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6033 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list")); 6034 } 6035 6036 VaListDecl->startDefinition(); 6037 6038 // void * __ap; 6039 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 6040 VaListDecl, 6041 SourceLocation(), 6042 SourceLocation(), 6043 &Context->Idents.get("__ap"), 6044 Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy), 6045 /*TInfo=*/0, 6046 /*BitWidth=*/0, 6047 /*Mutable=*/false, 6048 ICIS_NoInit); 6049 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 6050 VaListDecl->addDecl(Field); 6051 6052 // }; 6053 VaListDecl->completeDefinition(); 6054 6055 // typedef struct __va_list __builtin_va_list; 6056 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo 6057 = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Context->getRecordType(VaListDecl)); 6058 6059 TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl 6060 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 6061 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6062 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 6063 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 6064 TInfo); 6065 6066 return VaListTypeDecl; 6067} 6068 6069static TypedefDecl * 6070CreateSystemZBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) { 6071 // typedef struct __va_list_tag { 6072 RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl; 6073 VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct, 6074 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6075 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag")); 6076 VaListTagDecl->startDefinition(); 6077 6078 const size_t NumFields = 4; 6079 QualType FieldTypes[NumFields]; 6080 const char *FieldNames[NumFields]; 6081 6082 // long __gpr; 6083 FieldTypes[0] = Context->LongTy; 6084 FieldNames[0] = "__gpr"; 6085 6086 // long __fpr; 6087 FieldTypes[1] = Context->LongTy; 6088 FieldNames[1] = "__fpr"; 6089 6090 // void *__overflow_arg_area; 6091 FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 6092 FieldNames[2] = "__overflow_arg_area"; 6093 6094 // void *__reg_save_area; 6095 FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy); 6096 FieldNames[3] = "__reg_save_area"; 6097 6098 // Create fields 6099 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) { 6100 FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 6101 VaListTagDecl, 6102 SourceLocation(), 6103 SourceLocation(), 6104 &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), 6105 FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, 6106 /*BitWidth=*/0, 6107 /*Mutable=*/false, 6108 ICIS_NoInit); 6109 Field->setAccess(AS_public); 6110 VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field); 6111 } 6112 VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition(); 6113 QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl); 6114 Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType; 6115 6116 // } __va_list_tag; 6117 TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl 6118 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 6119 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6120 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 6121 &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"), 6122 Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType)); 6123 QualType VaListTagTypedefType = 6124 Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl); 6125 6126 // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1]; 6127 llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1); 6128 QualType VaListTagArrayType 6129 = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType, 6130 Size, ArrayType::Normal,0); 6131 TypeSourceInfo *TInfo 6132 = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType); 6133 TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl 6134 = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context), 6135 Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(), 6136 SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(), 6137 &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"), 6138 TInfo); 6139 6140 return VaListTypedefDecl; 6141} 6142 6143static TypedefDecl *CreateVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context, 6144 TargetInfo::BuiltinVaListKind Kind) { 6145 switch (Kind) { 6146 case TargetInfo::CharPtrBuiltinVaList: 6147 return CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6148 case TargetInfo::VoidPtrBuiltinVaList: 6149 return CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6150 case TargetInfo::AArch64ABIBuiltinVaList: 6151 return CreateAArch64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6152 case TargetInfo::PowerABIBuiltinVaList: 6153 return CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6154 case TargetInfo::X86_64ABIBuiltinVaList: 6155 return CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6156 case TargetInfo::PNaClABIBuiltinVaList: 6157 return CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6158 case TargetInfo::AAPCSABIBuiltinVaList: 6159 return CreateAAPCSABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6160 case TargetInfo::SystemZBuiltinVaList: 6161 return CreateSystemZBuiltinVaListDecl(Context); 6162 } 6163 6164 llvm_unreachable("Unhandled __builtin_va_list type kind"); 6165} 6166 6167TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getBuiltinVaListDecl() const { 6168 if (!BuiltinVaListDecl) 6169 BuiltinVaListDecl = CreateVaListDecl(this, Target->getBuiltinVaListKind()); 6170 6171 return BuiltinVaListDecl; 6172} 6173 6174QualType ASTContext::getVaListTagType() const { 6175 // Force the creation of VaListTagTy by building the __builtin_va_list 6176 // declaration. 6177 if (VaListTagTy.isNull()) 6178 (void) getBuiltinVaListDecl(); 6179 6180 return VaListTagTy; 6181} 6182 6183void ASTContext::setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) { 6184 assert(ObjCConstantStringType.isNull() && 6185 "'NSConstantString' type already set!"); 6186 6187 ObjCConstantStringType = getObjCInterfaceType(Decl); 6188} 6189 6190/// \brief Retrieve the template name that corresponds to a non-empty 6191/// lookup. 6192TemplateName 6193ASTContext::getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin, 6194 UnresolvedSetIterator End) const { 6195 unsigned size = End - Begin; 6196 assert(size > 1 && "set is not overloaded!"); 6197 6198 void *memory = Allocate(sizeof(OverloadedTemplateStorage) + 6199 size * sizeof(FunctionTemplateDecl*)); 6200 OverloadedTemplateStorage *OT = new(memory) OverloadedTemplateStorage(size); 6201 6202 NamedDecl **Storage = OT->getStorage(); 6203 for (UnresolvedSetIterator I = Begin; I != End; ++I) { 6204 NamedDecl *D = *I; 6205 assert(isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D) || 6206 (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D) && 6207 isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D->getUnderlyingDecl()))); 6208 *Storage++ = D; 6209 } 6210 6211 return TemplateName(OT); 6212} 6213 6214/// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a qualified 6215/// template name such as \c std::vector. 6216TemplateName 6217ASTContext::getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, 6218 bool TemplateKeyword, 6219 TemplateDecl *Template) const { 6220 assert(NNS && "Missing nested-name-specifier in qualified template name"); 6221 6222 // FIXME: Canonicalization? 6223 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 6224 QualifiedTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template); 6225 6226 void *InsertPos = 0; 6227 QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = 6228 QualifiedTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 6229 if (!QTN) { 6230 QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<QualifiedTemplateName>()) 6231 QualifiedTemplateName(NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template); 6232 QualifiedTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos); 6233 } 6234 6235 return TemplateName(QTN); 6236} 6237 6238/// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent 6239/// template name such as \c MetaFun::template apply. 6240TemplateName 6241ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, 6242 const IdentifierInfo *Name) const { 6243 assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) && 6244 "Nested name specifier must be dependent"); 6245 6246 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 6247 DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Name); 6248 6249 void *InsertPos = 0; 6250 DependentTemplateName *QTN = 6251 DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 6252 6253 if (QTN) 6254 return TemplateName(QTN); 6255 6256 NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); 6257 if (CanonNNS == NNS) { 6258 QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>()) 6259 DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name); 6260 } else { 6261 TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Name); 6262 QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>()) 6263 DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name, Canon); 6264 DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN = 6265 DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 6266 assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent type name canonicalization broken"); 6267 (void)CheckQTN; 6268 } 6269 6270 DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos); 6271 return TemplateName(QTN); 6272} 6273 6274/// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent 6275/// template name such as \c MetaFun::template operator+. 6276TemplateName 6277ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, 6278 OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const { 6279 assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) && 6280 "Nested name specifier must be dependent"); 6281 6282 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 6283 DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Operator); 6284 6285 void *InsertPos = 0; 6286 DependentTemplateName *QTN 6287 = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 6288 6289 if (QTN) 6290 return TemplateName(QTN); 6291 6292 NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); 6293 if (CanonNNS == NNS) { 6294 QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>()) 6295 DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator); 6296 } else { 6297 TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Operator); 6298 QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>()) 6299 DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator, Canon); 6300 6301 DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN 6302 = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 6303 assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent template name canonicalization broken"); 6304 (void)CheckQTN; 6305 } 6306 6307 DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos); 6308 return TemplateName(QTN); 6309} 6310 6311TemplateName 6312ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParm(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *param, 6313 TemplateName replacement) const { 6314 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 6315 SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage::Profile(ID, param, replacement); 6316 6317 void *insertPos = 0; 6318 SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst 6319 = SubstTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos); 6320 6321 if (!subst) { 6322 subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage(param, replacement); 6323 SubstTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(subst, insertPos); 6324 } 6325 6326 return TemplateName(subst); 6327} 6328 6329TemplateName 6330ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Param, 6331 const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) const { 6332 ASTContext &Self = const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this); 6333 llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; 6334 SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage::Profile(ID, Self, Param, ArgPack); 6335 6336 void *InsertPos = 0; 6337 SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *Subst 6338 = SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); 6339 6340 if (!Subst) { 6341 Subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage(Param, 6342 ArgPack.pack_size(), 6343 ArgPack.pack_begin()); 6344 SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.InsertNode(Subst, InsertPos); 6345 } 6346 6347 return TemplateName(Subst); 6348} 6349 6350/// getFromTargetType - Given one of the integer types provided by 6351/// TargetInfo, produce the corresponding type. The unsigned @p Type 6352/// is actually a value of type @c TargetInfo::IntType. 6353CanQualType ASTContext::getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const { 6354 switch (Type) { 6355 case TargetInfo::NoInt: return CanQualType(); 6356 case TargetInfo::SignedChar: return SignedCharTy; 6357 case TargetInfo::UnsignedChar: return UnsignedCharTy; 6358 case TargetInfo::SignedShort: return ShortTy; 6359 case TargetInfo::UnsignedShort: return UnsignedShortTy; 6360 case TargetInfo::SignedInt: return IntTy; 6361 case TargetInfo::UnsignedInt: return UnsignedIntTy; 6362 case TargetInfo::SignedLong: return LongTy; 6363 case TargetInfo::UnsignedLong: return UnsignedLongTy; 6364 case TargetInfo::SignedLongLong: return LongLongTy; 6365 case TargetInfo::UnsignedLongLong: return UnsignedLongLongTy; 6366 } 6367 6368 llvm_unreachable("Unhandled TargetInfo::IntType value"); 6369} 6370 6371//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 6372// Type Predicates. 6373//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 6374 6375/// getObjCGCAttr - Returns one of GCNone, Weak or Strong objc's 6376/// garbage collection attribute. 6377/// 6378Qualifiers::GC ASTContext::getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const { 6379 if (getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC) 6380 return Qualifiers::GCNone; 6381 6382 assert(getLangOpts().ObjC1); 6383 Qualifiers::GC GCAttrs = Ty.getObjCGCAttr(); 6384 6385 // Default behaviour under objective-C's gc is for ObjC pointers 6386 // (or pointers to them) be treated as though they were declared 6387 // as __strong. 6388 if (GCAttrs == Qualifiers::GCNone) { 6389 if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType()) 6390 return Qualifiers::Strong; 6391 else if (Ty->isPointerType()) 6392 return getObjCGCAttrKind(Ty->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType()); 6393 } else { 6394 // It's not valid to set GC attributes on anything that isn't a 6395 // pointer. 6396#ifndef NDEBUG 6397 QualType CT = Ty->getCanonicalTypeInternal(); 6398 while (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(CT)) 6399 CT = AT->getElementType(); 6400 assert(CT->isAnyPointerType() || CT->isBlockPointerType()); 6401#endif 6402 } 6403 return GCAttrs; 6404} 6405 6406//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 6407// Type Compatibility Testing 6408//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 6409 6410/// areCompatVectorTypes - Return true if the two specified vector types are 6411/// compatible. 6412static bool areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType *LHS, 6413 const VectorType *RHS) { 6414 assert(LHS->isCanonicalUnqualified() && RHS->isCanonicalUnqualified()); 6415 return LHS->getElementType() == RHS->getElementType() && 6416 LHS->getNumElements() == RHS->getNumElements(); 6417} 6418 6419bool ASTContext::areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec, 6420 QualType SecondVec) { 6421 assert(FirstVec->isVectorType() && "FirstVec should be a vector type"); 6422 assert(SecondVec->isVectorType() && "SecondVec should be a vector type"); 6423 6424 if (hasSameUnqualifiedType(FirstVec, SecondVec)) 6425 return true; 6426 6427 // Treat Neon vector types and most AltiVec vector types as if they are the 6428 // equivalent GCC vector types. 6429 const VectorType *First = FirstVec->getAs<VectorType>(); 6430 const VectorType *Second = SecondVec->getAs<VectorType>(); 6431 if (First->getNumElements() == Second->getNumElements() && 6432 hasSameType(First->getElementType(), Second->getElementType()) && 6433 First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel && 6434 First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool && 6435 Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel && 6436 Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool) 6437 return true; 6438 6439 return false; 6440} 6441 6442//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 6443// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - Compatibility testing for qualified id's. 6444//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 6445 6446/// ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol - return 'true' if 'lProto' is in the 6447/// inheritance hierarchy of 'rProto'. 6448bool 6449ASTContext::ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl *lProto, 6450 ObjCProtocolDecl *rProto) const { 6451 if (declaresSameEntity(lProto, rProto)) 6452 return true; 6453 for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator PI = rProto->protocol_begin(), 6454 E = rProto->protocol_end(); PI != E; ++PI) 6455 if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lProto, *PI)) 6456 return true; 6457 return false; 6458} 6459 6460/// ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible - compare Class<pr,...> and 6461/// Class<pr1, ...>. 6462bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, 6463 QualType rhs) { 6464 const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); 6465 const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); 6466 assert ((lhsQID && rhsOPT) && "ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible"); 6467 6468 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), 6469 E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { 6470 bool match = false; 6471 ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I; 6472 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(), 6473 E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { 6474 ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; 6475 if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto)) { 6476 match = true; 6477 break; 6478 } 6479 } 6480 if (!match) 6481 return false; 6482 } 6483 return true; 6484} 6485 6486/// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - We know that one of lhs/rhs is an 6487/// ObjCQualifiedIDType. 6488bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, QualType rhs, 6489 bool compare) { 6490 // Allow id<P..> and an 'id' or void* type in all cases. 6491 if (lhs->isVoidPointerType() || 6492 lhs->isObjCIdType() || lhs->isObjCClassType()) 6493 return true; 6494 else if (rhs->isVoidPointerType() || 6495 rhs->isObjCIdType() || rhs->isObjCClassType()) 6496 return true; 6497 6498 if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType()) { 6499 const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); 6500 6501 if (!rhsOPT) return false; 6502 6503 if (rhsOPT->qual_empty()) { 6504 // If the RHS is a unqualified interface pointer "NSString*", 6505 // make sure we check the class hierarchy. 6506 if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) { 6507 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), 6508 E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { 6509 // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs, 6510 // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or 6511 // through its super class and categories. 6512 if (!rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) 6513 return false; 6514 } 6515 } 6516 // If there are no qualifiers and no interface, we have an 'id'. 6517 return true; 6518 } 6519 // Both the right and left sides have qualifiers. 6520 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), 6521 E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { 6522 ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I; 6523 bool match = false; 6524 6525 // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs, 6526 // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or 6527 // through its super class and categories. 6528 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(), 6529 E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { 6530 ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; 6531 if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) || 6532 (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) { 6533 match = true; 6534 break; 6535 } 6536 } 6537 // If the RHS is a qualified interface pointer "NSString<P>*", 6538 // make sure we check the class hierarchy. 6539 if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) { 6540 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), 6541 E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { 6542 // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs, 6543 // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or 6544 // through its super class and categories. 6545 if (rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) { 6546 match = true; 6547 break; 6548 } 6549 } 6550 } 6551 if (!match) 6552 return false; 6553 } 6554 6555 return true; 6556 } 6557 6558 const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsQID = rhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType(); 6559 assert(rhsQID && "One of the LHS/RHS should be id<x>"); 6560 6561 if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsOPT = 6562 lhs->getAsObjCInterfacePointerType()) { 6563 // If both the right and left sides have qualifiers. 6564 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsOPT->qual_begin(), 6565 E = lhsOPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { 6566 ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I; 6567 bool match = false; 6568 6569 // when comparing an id<P> on rhs with a static type on lhs, 6570 // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or 6571 // through its super class and categories. 6572 // First, lhs protocols in the qualifier list must be found, direct 6573 // or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch. 6574 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(), 6575 E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { 6576 ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; 6577 if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) || 6578 (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) { 6579 match = true; 6580 break; 6581 } 6582 } 6583 if (!match) 6584 return false; 6585 } 6586 6587 // Static class's protocols, or its super class or category protocols 6588 // must be found, direct or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch. 6589 if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *lhsID = lhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) { 6590 llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols; 6591 CollectInheritedProtocols(lhsID, LHSInheritedProtocols); 6592 // This is rather dubious but matches gcc's behavior. If lhs has 6593 // no type qualifier and its class has no static protocol(s) 6594 // assume that it is mismatch. 6595 if (LHSInheritedProtocols.empty() && lhsOPT->qual_empty()) 6596 return false; 6597 for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I = 6598 LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(), 6599 E = LHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) { 6600 bool match = false; 6601 ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = (*I); 6602 for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(), 6603 E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { 6604 ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; 6605 if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) || 6606 (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) { 6607 match = true; 6608 break; 6609 } 6610 } 6611 if (!match) 6612 return false; 6613 } 6614 } 6615 return true; 6616 } 6617 return false; 6618} 6619 6620/// canAssignObjCInterfaces - Return true if the two interface types are 6621/// compatible for assignment from RHS to LHS. This handles validation of any 6622/// protocol qualifiers on the LHS or RHS. 6623/// 6624bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT, 6625 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) { 6626 const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType(); 6627 const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType(); 6628 6629 // If either type represents the built-in 'id' or 'Class' types, return true. 6630 if (LHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() || 6631 RHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass()) 6632 return true; 6633 6634 if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedId() || RHS->isObjCQualifiedId()) 6635 return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0), 6636 QualType(RHSOPT,0), 6637 false); 6638 6639 if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedClass() && RHS->isObjCQualifiedClass()) 6640 return ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0), 6641 QualType(RHSOPT,0)); 6642 6643 // If we have 2 user-defined types, fall into that path. 6644 if (LHS->getInterface() && RHS->getInterface()) 6645 return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS); 6646 6647 return false; 6648} 6649 6650/// canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer - This routine is specifically written 6651/// for providing type-safety for objective-c pointers used to pass/return 6652/// arguments in block literals. When passed as arguments, passing 'A*' where 6653/// 'id' is expected is not OK. Passing 'Sub *" where 'Super *" is expected is 6654/// not OK. For the return type, the opposite is not OK. 6655bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer( 6656 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT, 6657 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT, 6658 bool BlockReturnType) { 6659 if (RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || LHSOPT->isObjCIdType()) 6660 return true; 6661 6662 if (LHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType()) { 6663 return RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType(); 6664 } 6665 6666 if (LHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) 6667 return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0), 6668 QualType(RHSOPT,0), 6669 false); 6670 6671 const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = LHSOPT->getInterfaceType(); 6672 const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = RHSOPT->getInterfaceType(); 6673 if (LHS && RHS) { // We have 2 user-defined types. 6674 if (LHS != RHS) { 6675 if (LHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getDecl())) 6676 return BlockReturnType; 6677 if (RHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(LHS->getDecl())) 6678 return !BlockReturnType; 6679 } 6680 else 6681 return true; 6682 } 6683 return false; 6684} 6685 6686/// getIntersectionOfProtocols - This routine finds the intersection of set 6687/// of protocols inherited from two distinct objective-c pointer objects. 6688/// It is used to build composite qualifier list of the composite type of 6689/// the conditional expression involving two objective-c pointer objects. 6690static 6691void getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext &Context, 6692 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT, 6693 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT, 6694 SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl *> &IntersectionOfProtocols) { 6695 6696 const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType(); 6697 const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType(); 6698 assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS must have an interface base"); 6699 assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS must have an interface base"); 6700 6701 llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> InheritedProtocolSet; 6702 unsigned LHSNumProtocols = LHS->getNumProtocols(); 6703 if (LHSNumProtocols > 0) 6704 InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHS->qual_begin(), LHS->qual_end()); 6705 else { 6706 llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols; 6707 Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(LHS->getInterface(), 6708 LHSInheritedProtocols); 6709 InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(), 6710 LHSInheritedProtocols.end()); 6711 } 6712 6713 unsigned RHSNumProtocols = RHS->getNumProtocols(); 6714 if (RHSNumProtocols > 0) { 6715 ObjCProtocolDecl **RHSProtocols = 6716 const_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl **>(RHS->qual_begin()); 6717 for (unsigned i = 0; i < RHSNumProtocols; ++i) 6718 if (InheritedProtocolSet.count(RHSProtocols[i])) 6719 IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back(RHSProtocols[i]); 6720 } else { 6721 llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> RHSInheritedProtocols; 6722 Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), 6723 RHSInheritedProtocols); 6724 for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I = 6725 RHSInheritedProtocols.begin(), 6726 E = RHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) 6727 if (InheritedProtocolSet.count((*I))) 6728 IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back((*I)); 6729 } 6730} 6731 6732/// areCommonBaseCompatible - Returns common base class of the two classes if 6733/// one found. Note that this is O'2 algorithm. But it will be called as the 6734/// last type comparison in a ?-exp of ObjC pointer types before a 6735/// warning is issued. So, its invokation is extremely rare. 6736QualType ASTContext::areCommonBaseCompatible( 6737 const ObjCObjectPointerType *Lptr, 6738 const ObjCObjectPointerType *Rptr) { 6739 const ObjCObjectType *LHS = Lptr->getObjectType(); 6740 const ObjCObjectType *RHS = Rptr->getObjectType(); 6741 const ObjCInterfaceDecl* LDecl = LHS->getInterface(); 6742 const ObjCInterfaceDecl* RDecl = RHS->getInterface(); 6743 if (!LDecl || !RDecl || (declaresSameEntity(LDecl, RDecl))) 6744 return QualType(); 6745 6746 do { 6747 LHS = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(getObjCInterfaceType(LDecl)); 6748 if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS)) { 6749 SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> Protocols; 6750 getIntersectionOfProtocols(*this, Lptr, Rptr, Protocols); 6751 6752 QualType Result = QualType(LHS, 0); 6753 if (!Protocols.empty()) 6754 Result = getObjCObjectType(Result, Protocols.data(), Protocols.size()); 6755 Result = getObjCObjectPointerType(Result); 6756 return Result; 6757 } 6758 } while ((LDecl = LDecl->getSuperClass())); 6759 6760 return QualType(); 6761} 6762 6763bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType *LHS, 6764 const ObjCObjectType *RHS) { 6765 assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS is not an interface type"); 6766 assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS is not an interface type"); 6767 6768 // Verify that the base decls are compatible: the RHS must be a subclass of 6769 // the LHS. 6770 if (!LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface())) 6771 return false; 6772 6773 // RHS must have a superset of the protocols in the LHS. If the LHS is not 6774 // protocol qualified at all, then we are good. 6775 if (LHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) 6776 return true; 6777 6778 // Okay, we know the LHS has protocol qualifiers. If the RHS doesn't, 6779 // more detailed analysis is required. 6780 if (RHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) { 6781 // OK, if LHS is a superclass of RHS *and* 6782 // this superclass is assignment compatible with LHS. 6783 // false otherwise. 6784 bool IsSuperClass = 6785 LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface()); 6786 if (IsSuperClass) { 6787 // OK if conversion of LHS to SuperClass results in narrowing of types 6788 // ; i.e., SuperClass may implement at least one of the protocols 6789 // in LHS's protocol list. Example, SuperObj<P1> = lhs<P1,P2> is ok. 6790 // But not SuperObj<P1,P2,P3> = lhs<P1,P2>. 6791 llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> SuperClassInheritedProtocols; 6792 CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), SuperClassInheritedProtocols); 6793 // If super class has no protocols, it is not a match. 6794 if (SuperClassInheritedProtocols.empty()) 6795 return false; 6796 6797 for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(), 6798 LHSPE = LHS->qual_end(); 6799 LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) { 6800 bool SuperImplementsProtocol = false; 6801 ObjCProtocolDecl *LHSProto = (*LHSPI); 6802 6803 for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I = 6804 SuperClassInheritedProtocols.begin(), 6805 E = SuperClassInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) { 6806 ObjCProtocolDecl *SuperClassProto = (*I); 6807 if (SuperClassProto->lookupProtocolNamed(LHSProto->getIdentifier())) { 6808 SuperImplementsProtocol = true; 6809 break; 6810 } 6811 } 6812 if (!SuperImplementsProtocol) 6813 return false; 6814 } 6815 return true; 6816 } 6817 return false; 6818 } 6819 6820 for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(), 6821 LHSPE = LHS->qual_end(); 6822 LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) { 6823 bool RHSImplementsProtocol = false; 6824 6825 // If the RHS doesn't implement the protocol on the left, the types 6826 // are incompatible. 6827 for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator RHSPI = RHS->qual_begin(), 6828 RHSPE = RHS->qual_end(); 6829 RHSPI != RHSPE; RHSPI++) { 6830 if ((*RHSPI)->lookupProtocolNamed((*LHSPI)->getIdentifier())) { 6831 RHSImplementsProtocol = true; 6832 break; 6833 } 6834 } 6835 // FIXME: For better diagnostics, consider passing back the protocol name. 6836 if (!RHSImplementsProtocol) 6837 return false; 6838 } 6839 // The RHS implements all protocols listed on the LHS. 6840 return true; 6841} 6842 6843bool ASTContext::areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) { 6844 // get the "pointed to" types 6845 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); 6846 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); 6847 6848 if (!LHSOPT || !RHSOPT) 6849 return false; 6850 6851 return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSOPT, RHSOPT) || 6852 canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSOPT, LHSOPT); 6853} 6854 6855bool ASTContext::canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To, QualType From) { 6856 return canAssignObjCInterfaces( 6857 getObjCObjectPointerType(To)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), 6858 getObjCObjectPointerType(From)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()); 6859} 6860 6861/// typesAreCompatible - C99 6.7.3p9: For two qualified types to be compatible, 6862/// both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type. 6863/// C99 6.2.7p1: Two types have compatible types if their types are the 6864/// same. See 6.7.[2,3,5] for additional rules. 6865bool ASTContext::typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS, 6866 bool CompareUnqualified) { 6867 if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) 6868 return hasSameType(LHS, RHS); 6869 6870 return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, false, CompareUnqualified).isNull(); 6871} 6872 6873bool ASTContext::propertyTypesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) { 6874 return typesAreCompatible(LHS, RHS); 6875} 6876 6877bool ASTContext::typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) { 6878 return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true).isNull(); 6879} 6880 6881/// mergeTransparentUnionType - if T is a transparent union type and a member 6882/// of T is compatible with SubType, return the merged type, else return 6883/// QualType() 6884QualType ASTContext::mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T, QualType SubType, 6885 bool OfBlockPointer, 6886 bool Unqualified) { 6887 if (const RecordType *UT = T->getAsUnionType()) { 6888 RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl(); 6889 if (UD->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) { 6890 for (RecordDecl::field_iterator it = UD->field_begin(), 6891 itend = UD->field_end(); it != itend; ++it) { 6892 QualType ET = it->getType().getUnqualifiedType(); 6893 QualType MT = mergeTypes(ET, SubType, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified); 6894 if (!MT.isNull()) 6895 return MT; 6896 } 6897 } 6898 } 6899 6900 return QualType(); 6901} 6902 6903/// mergeFunctionArgumentTypes - merge two types which appear as function 6904/// argument types 6905QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs, 6906 bool OfBlockPointer, 6907 bool Unqualified) { 6908 // GNU extension: two types are compatible if they appear as a function 6909 // argument, one of the types is a transparent union type and the other 6910 // type is compatible with a union member 6911 QualType lmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, 6912 Unqualified); 6913 if (!lmerge.isNull()) 6914 return lmerge; 6915 6916 QualType rmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(rhs, lhs, OfBlockPointer, 6917 Unqualified); 6918 if (!rmerge.isNull()) 6919 return rmerge; 6920 6921 return mergeTypes(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified); 6922} 6923 6924QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs, 6925 bool OfBlockPointer, 6926 bool Unqualified) { 6927 const FunctionType *lbase = lhs->getAs<FunctionType>(); 6928 const FunctionType *rbase = rhs->getAs<FunctionType>(); 6929 const FunctionProtoType *lproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(lbase); 6930 const FunctionProtoType *rproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(rbase); 6931 bool allLTypes = true; 6932 bool allRTypes = true; 6933 6934 // Check return type 6935 QualType retType; 6936 if (OfBlockPointer) { 6937 QualType RHS = rbase->getResultType(); 6938 QualType LHS = lbase->getResultType(); 6939 bool UnqualifiedResult = Unqualified; 6940 if (!UnqualifiedResult) 6941 UnqualifiedResult = (!RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers()); 6942 retType = mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true, UnqualifiedResult, true); 6943 } 6944 else 6945 retType = mergeTypes(lbase->getResultType(), rbase->getResultType(), false, 6946 Unqualified); 6947 if (retType.isNull()) return QualType(); 6948 6949 if (Unqualified) 6950 retType = retType.getUnqualifiedType(); 6951 6952 CanQualType LRetType = getCanonicalType(lbase->getResultType()); 6953 CanQualType RRetType = getCanonicalType(rbase->getResultType()); 6954 if (Unqualified) { 6955 LRetType = LRetType.getUnqualifiedType(); 6956 RRetType = RRetType.getUnqualifiedType(); 6957 } 6958 6959 if (getCanonicalType(retType) != LRetType) 6960 allLTypes = false; 6961 if (getCanonicalType(retType) != RRetType) 6962 allRTypes = false; 6963 6964 // FIXME: double check this 6965 // FIXME: should we error if lbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 && 6966 // rbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 && 6967 // lbase->getRegParmAttr() != rbase->getRegParmAttr()? 6968 FunctionType::ExtInfo lbaseInfo = lbase->getExtInfo(); 6969 FunctionType::ExtInfo rbaseInfo = rbase->getExtInfo(); 6970 6971 // Compatible functions must have compatible calling conventions 6972 if (lbaseInfo.getCC() != rbaseInfo.getCC()) 6973 return QualType(); 6974 6975 // Regparm is part of the calling convention. 6976 if (lbaseInfo.getHasRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getHasRegParm()) 6977 return QualType(); 6978 if (lbaseInfo.getRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getRegParm()) 6979 return QualType(); 6980 6981 if (lbaseInfo.getProducesResult() != rbaseInfo.getProducesResult()) 6982 return QualType(); 6983 6984 // FIXME: some uses, e.g. conditional exprs, really want this to be 'both'. 6985 bool NoReturn = lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() || rbaseInfo.getNoReturn(); 6986 6987 if (lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() != NoReturn) 6988 allLTypes = false; 6989 if (rbaseInfo.getNoReturn() != NoReturn) 6990 allRTypes = false; 6991 6992 FunctionType::ExtInfo einfo = lbaseInfo.withNoReturn(NoReturn); 6993 6994 if (lproto && rproto) { // two C99 style function prototypes 6995 assert(!lproto->hasExceptionSpec() && !rproto->hasExceptionSpec() && 6996 "C++ shouldn't be here"); 6997 unsigned lproto_nargs = lproto->getNumArgs(); 6998 unsigned rproto_nargs = rproto->getNumArgs(); 6999 7000 // Compatible functions must have the same number of arguments 7001 if (lproto_nargs != rproto_nargs) 7002 return QualType(); 7003 7004 // Variadic and non-variadic functions aren't compatible 7005 if (lproto->isVariadic() != rproto->isVariadic()) 7006 return QualType(); 7007 7008 if (lproto->getTypeQuals() != rproto->getTypeQuals()) 7009 return QualType(); 7010 7011 if (LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount && 7012 !FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(rproto, lproto)) 7013 return QualType(); 7014 7015 // Check argument compatibility 7016 SmallVector<QualType, 10> types; 7017 for (unsigned i = 0; i < lproto_nargs; i++) { 7018 QualType largtype = lproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType(); 7019 QualType rargtype = rproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType(); 7020 QualType argtype = mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(largtype, rargtype, 7021 OfBlockPointer, 7022 Unqualified); 7023 if (argtype.isNull()) return QualType(); 7024 7025 if (Unqualified) 7026 argtype = argtype.getUnqualifiedType(); 7027 7028 types.push_back(argtype); 7029 if (Unqualified) { 7030 largtype = largtype.getUnqualifiedType(); 7031 rargtype = rargtype.getUnqualifiedType(); 7032 } 7033 7034 if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(largtype)) 7035 allLTypes = false; 7036 if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(rargtype)) 7037 allRTypes = false; 7038 } 7039 7040 if (allLTypes) return lhs; 7041 if (allRTypes) return rhs; 7042 7043 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = lproto->getExtProtoInfo(); 7044 EPI.ExtInfo = einfo; 7045 return getFunctionType(retType, types, EPI); 7046 } 7047 7048 if (lproto) allRTypes = false; 7049 if (rproto) allLTypes = false; 7050 7051 const FunctionProtoType *proto = lproto ? lproto : rproto; 7052 if (proto) { 7053 assert(!proto->hasExceptionSpec() && "C++ shouldn't be here"); 7054 if (proto->isVariadic()) return QualType(); 7055 // Check that the types are compatible with the types that 7056 // would result from default argument promotions (C99 6.7.5.3p15). 7057 // The only types actually affected are promotable integer 7058 // types and floats, which would be passed as a different 7059 // type depending on whether the prototype is visible. 7060 unsigned proto_nargs = proto->getNumArgs(); 7061 for (unsigned i = 0; i < proto_nargs; ++i) { 7062 QualType argTy = proto->getArgType(i); 7063 7064 // Look at the converted type of enum types, since that is the type used 7065 // to pass enum values. 7066 if (const EnumType *Enum = argTy->getAs<EnumType>()) { 7067 argTy = Enum->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); 7068 if (argTy.isNull()) 7069 return QualType(); 7070 } 7071 7072 if (argTy->isPromotableIntegerType() || 7073 getCanonicalType(argTy).getUnqualifiedType() == FloatTy) 7074 return QualType(); 7075 } 7076 7077 if (allLTypes) return lhs; 7078 if (allRTypes) return rhs; 7079 7080 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = proto->getExtProtoInfo(); 7081 EPI.ExtInfo = einfo; 7082 return getFunctionType(retType, proto->getArgTypes(), EPI); 7083 } 7084 7085 if (allLTypes) return lhs; 7086 if (allRTypes) return rhs; 7087 return getFunctionNoProtoType(retType, einfo); 7088} 7089 7090/// Given that we have an enum type and a non-enum type, try to merge them. 7091static QualType mergeEnumWithInteger(ASTContext &Context, const EnumType *ET, 7092 QualType other, bool isBlockReturnType) { 7093 // C99 6.7.2.2p4: Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char, 7094 // a signed integer type, or an unsigned integer type. 7095 // Compatibility is based on the underlying type, not the promotion 7096 // type. 7097 QualType underlyingType = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); 7098 if (underlyingType.isNull()) return QualType(); 7099 if (Context.hasSameType(underlyingType, other)) 7100 return other; 7101 7102 // In block return types, we're more permissive and accept any 7103 // integral type of the same size. 7104 if (isBlockReturnType && other->isIntegerType() && 7105 Context.getTypeSize(underlyingType) == Context.getTypeSize(other)) 7106 return other; 7107 7108 return QualType(); 7109} 7110 7111QualType ASTContext::mergeTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS, 7112 bool OfBlockPointer, 7113 bool Unqualified, bool BlockReturnType) { 7114 // C++ [expr]: If an expression initially has the type "reference to T", the 7115 // type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further analysis, the expression 7116 // designates the object or function denoted by the reference, and the 7117 // expression is an lvalue unless the reference is an rvalue reference and 7118 // the expression is a function call (possibly inside parentheses). 7119 assert(!LHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "LHS is a reference type?"); 7120 assert(!RHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "RHS is a reference type?"); 7121 7122 if (Unqualified) { 7123 LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType(); 7124 RHS = RHS.getUnqualifiedType(); 7125 } 7126 7127 QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS), 7128 RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS); 7129 7130 // If two types are identical, they are compatible. 7131 if (LHSCan == RHSCan) 7132 return LHS; 7133 7134 // If the qualifiers are different, the types aren't compatible... mostly. 7135 Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); 7136 Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); 7137 if (LQuals != RQuals) { 7138 // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type 7139 // mismatch. 7140 if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() || 7141 LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace() || 7142 LQuals.getObjCLifetime() != RQuals.getObjCLifetime()) 7143 return QualType(); 7144 7145 // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is 7146 // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective 7147 // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default). We fix 7148 // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually 7149 // qualified __strong. 7150 Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); 7151 Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); 7152 assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements"); 7153 7154 if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak) 7155 return QualType(); 7156 7157 if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) { 7158 return mergeTypes(LHS, getObjCGCQualType(RHS, Qualifiers::Strong)); 7159 } 7160 if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong && LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) { 7161 return mergeTypes(getObjCGCQualType(LHS, Qualifiers::Strong), RHS); 7162 } 7163 return QualType(); 7164 } 7165 7166 // Okay, qualifiers are equal. 7167 7168 Type::TypeClass LHSClass = LHSCan->getTypeClass(); 7169 Type::TypeClass RHSClass = RHSCan->getTypeClass(); 7170 7171 // We want to consider the two function types to be the same for these 7172 // comparisons, just force one to the other. 7173 if (LHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) LHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto; 7174 if (RHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) RHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto; 7175 7176 // Same as above for arrays 7177 if (LHSClass == Type::VariableArray || LHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray) 7178 LHSClass = Type::ConstantArray; 7179 if (RHSClass == Type::VariableArray || RHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray) 7180 RHSClass = Type::ConstantArray; 7181 7182 // ObjCInterfaces are just specialized ObjCObjects. 7183 if (LHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) LHSClass = Type::ObjCObject; 7184 if (RHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) RHSClass = Type::ObjCObject; 7185 7186 // Canonicalize ExtVector -> Vector. 7187 if (LHSClass == Type::ExtVector) LHSClass = Type::Vector; 7188 if (RHSClass == Type::ExtVector) RHSClass = Type::Vector; 7189 7190 // If the canonical type classes don't match. 7191 if (LHSClass != RHSClass) { 7192 // Note that we only have special rules for turning block enum 7193 // returns into block int returns, not vice-versa. 7194 if (const EnumType* ETy = LHS->getAs<EnumType>()) { 7195 return mergeEnumWithInteger(*this, ETy, RHS, false); 7196 } 7197 if (const EnumType* ETy = RHS->getAs<EnumType>()) { 7198 return mergeEnumWithInteger(*this, ETy, LHS, BlockReturnType); 7199 } 7200 // allow block pointer type to match an 'id' type. 7201 if (OfBlockPointer && !BlockReturnType) { 7202 if (LHS->isObjCIdType() && RHS->isBlockPointerType()) 7203 return LHS; 7204 if (RHS->isObjCIdType() && LHS->isBlockPointerType()) 7205 return RHS; 7206 } 7207 7208 return QualType(); 7209 } 7210 7211 // The canonical type classes match. 7212 switch (LHSClass) { 7213#define TYPE(Class, Base) 7214#define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base) 7215#define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: 7216#define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: 7217#define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: 7218#include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" 7219 llvm_unreachable("Non-canonical and dependent types shouldn't get here"); 7220 7221 case Type::Auto: 7222 case Type::LValueReference: 7223 case Type::RValueReference: 7224 case Type::MemberPointer: 7225 llvm_unreachable("C++ should never be in mergeTypes"); 7226 7227 case Type::ObjCInterface: 7228 case Type::IncompleteArray: 7229 case Type::VariableArray: 7230 case Type::FunctionProto: 7231 case Type::ExtVector: 7232 llvm_unreachable("Types are eliminated above"); 7233 7234 case Type::Pointer: 7235 { 7236 // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info 7237 QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 7238 QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 7239 if (Unqualified) { 7240 LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); 7241 RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); 7242 } 7243 QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, false, 7244 Unqualified); 7245 if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType(); 7246 if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7247 return LHS; 7248 if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7249 return RHS; 7250 return getPointerType(ResultType); 7251 } 7252 case Type::BlockPointer: 7253 { 7254 // Merge two block pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info 7255 QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 7256 QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 7257 if (Unqualified) { 7258 LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); 7259 RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); 7260 } 7261 QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, OfBlockPointer, 7262 Unqualified); 7263 if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType(); 7264 if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7265 return LHS; 7266 if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7267 return RHS; 7268 return getBlockPointerType(ResultType); 7269 } 7270 case Type::Atomic: 7271 { 7272 // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info 7273 QualType LHSValue = LHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType(); 7274 QualType RHSValue = RHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType(); 7275 if (Unqualified) { 7276 LHSValue = LHSValue.getUnqualifiedType(); 7277 RHSValue = RHSValue.getUnqualifiedType(); 7278 } 7279 QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSValue, RHSValue, false, 7280 Unqualified); 7281 if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType(); 7282 if (getCanonicalType(LHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7283 return LHS; 7284 if (getCanonicalType(RHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7285 return RHS; 7286 return getAtomicType(ResultType); 7287 } 7288 case Type::ConstantArray: 7289 { 7290 const ConstantArrayType* LCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(LHS); 7291 const ConstantArrayType* RCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(RHS); 7292 if (LCAT && RCAT && RCAT->getSize() != LCAT->getSize()) 7293 return QualType(); 7294 7295 QualType LHSElem = getAsArrayType(LHS)->getElementType(); 7296 QualType RHSElem = getAsArrayType(RHS)->getElementType(); 7297 if (Unqualified) { 7298 LHSElem = LHSElem.getUnqualifiedType(); 7299 RHSElem = RHSElem.getUnqualifiedType(); 7300 } 7301 7302 QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSElem, RHSElem, false, Unqualified); 7303 if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType(); 7304 if (LCAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7305 return LHS; 7306 if (RCAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7307 return RHS; 7308 if (LCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, LCAT->getSize(), 7309 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0); 7310 if (RCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, RCAT->getSize(), 7311 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0); 7312 const VariableArrayType* LVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(LHS); 7313 const VariableArrayType* RVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(RHS); 7314 if (LVAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7315 return LHS; 7316 if (RVAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) 7317 return RHS; 7318 if (LVAT) { 7319 // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because 7320 // the array's size has to be the size of LHS, but the type 7321 // has to be different. 7322 return LHS; 7323 } 7324 if (RVAT) { 7325 // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because 7326 // the array's size has to be the size of RHS, but the type 7327 // has to be different. 7328 return RHS; 7329 } 7330 if (getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return LHS; 7331 if (getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return RHS; 7332 return getIncompleteArrayType(ResultType, 7333 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0); 7334 } 7335 case Type::FunctionNoProto: 7336 return mergeFunctionTypes(LHS, RHS, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified); 7337 case Type::Record: 7338 case Type::Enum: 7339 return QualType(); 7340 case Type::Builtin: 7341 // Only exactly equal builtin types are compatible, which is tested above. 7342 return QualType(); 7343 case Type::Complex: 7344 // Distinct complex types are incompatible. 7345 return QualType(); 7346 case Type::Vector: 7347 // FIXME: The merged type should be an ExtVector! 7348 if (areCompatVectorTypes(LHSCan->getAs<VectorType>(), 7349 RHSCan->getAs<VectorType>())) 7350 return LHS; 7351 return QualType(); 7352 case Type::ObjCObject: { 7353 // Check if the types are assignment compatible. 7354 // FIXME: This should be type compatibility, e.g. whether 7355 // "LHS x; RHS x;" at global scope is legal. 7356 const ObjCObjectType* LHSIface = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>(); 7357 const ObjCObjectType* RHSIface = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>(); 7358 if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface)) 7359 return LHS; 7360 7361 return QualType(); 7362 } 7363 case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: { 7364 if (OfBlockPointer) { 7365 if (canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer( 7366 LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), 7367 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), 7368 BlockReturnType)) 7369 return LHS; 7370 return QualType(); 7371 } 7372 if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), 7373 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>())) 7374 return LHS; 7375 7376 return QualType(); 7377 } 7378 } 7379 7380 llvm_unreachable("Invalid Type::Class!"); 7381} 7382 7383bool ASTContext::FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs( 7384 const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType, 7385 const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType) { 7386 if (FromFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs() != 7387 ToFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs()) 7388 return false; 7389 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo FromEPI = 7390 FromFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo(); 7391 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo ToEPI = 7392 ToFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo(); 7393 if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments && ToEPI.ConsumedArguments) 7394 for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumArgs(); 7395 ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx) { 7396 if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx] != 7397 ToEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx]) 7398 return false; 7399 } 7400 return true; 7401} 7402 7403/// mergeObjCGCQualifiers - This routine merges ObjC's GC attribute of 'LHS' and 7404/// 'RHS' attributes and returns the merged version; including for function 7405/// return types. 7406QualType ASTContext::mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) { 7407 QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS), 7408 RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS); 7409 // If two types are identical, they are compatible. 7410 if (LHSCan == RHSCan) 7411 return LHS; 7412 if (RHSCan->isFunctionType()) { 7413 if (!LHSCan->isFunctionType()) 7414 return QualType(); 7415 QualType OldReturnType = 7416 cast<FunctionType>(RHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType(); 7417 QualType NewReturnType = 7418 cast<FunctionType>(LHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType(); 7419 QualType ResReturnType = 7420 mergeObjCGCQualifiers(NewReturnType, OldReturnType); 7421 if (ResReturnType.isNull()) 7422 return QualType(); 7423 if (ResReturnType == NewReturnType || ResReturnType == OldReturnType) { 7424 // id foo(); ... __strong id foo(); or: __strong id foo(); ... id foo(); 7425 // In either case, use OldReturnType to build the new function type. 7426 const FunctionType *F = LHS->getAs<FunctionType>(); 7427 if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(F)) { 7428 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo(); 7429 EPI.ExtInfo = getFunctionExtInfo(LHS); 7430 QualType ResultType = 7431 getFunctionType(OldReturnType, FPT->getArgTypes(), EPI); 7432 return ResultType; 7433 } 7434 } 7435 return QualType(); 7436 } 7437 7438 // If the qualifiers are different, the types can still be merged. 7439 Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); 7440 Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); 7441 if (LQuals != RQuals) { 7442 // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type mismatch. 7443 if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() || 7444 LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace()) 7445 return QualType(); 7446 7447 // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is 7448 // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective 7449 // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default). We fix 7450 // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually 7451 // qualified __strong. 7452 Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); 7453 Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); 7454 assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements"); 7455 7456 if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak) 7457 return QualType(); 7458 7459 if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong) 7460 return LHS; 7461 if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong) 7462 return RHS; 7463 return QualType(); 7464 } 7465 7466 if (LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType() && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) { 7467 QualType LHSBaseQT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 7468 QualType RHSBaseQT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); 7469 QualType ResQT = mergeObjCGCQualifiers(LHSBaseQT, RHSBaseQT); 7470 if (ResQT == LHSBaseQT) 7471 return LHS; 7472 if (ResQT == RHSBaseQT) 7473 return RHS; 7474 } 7475 return QualType(); 7476} 7477 7478//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 7479// Integer Predicates 7480//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 7481 7482unsigned ASTContext::getIntWidth(QualType T) const { 7483 if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>()) 7484 T = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); 7485 if (T->isBooleanType()) 7486 return 1; 7487 // For builtin types, just use the standard type sizing method 7488 return (unsigned)getTypeSize(T); 7489} 7490 7491QualType ASTContext::getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) const { 7492 assert(T->hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() && "Unexpected type"); 7493 7494 // Turn <4 x signed int> -> <4 x unsigned int> 7495 if (const VectorType *VTy = T->getAs<VectorType>()) 7496 return getVectorType(getCorrespondingUnsignedType(VTy->getElementType()), 7497 VTy->getNumElements(), VTy->getVectorKind()); 7498 7499 // For enums, we return the unsigned version of the base type. 7500 if (const EnumType *ETy = T->getAs<EnumType>()) 7501 T = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); 7502 7503 const BuiltinType *BTy = T->getAs<BuiltinType>(); 7504 assert(BTy && "Unexpected signed integer type"); 7505 switch (BTy->getKind()) { 7506 case BuiltinType::Char_S: 7507 case BuiltinType::SChar: 7508 return UnsignedCharTy; 7509 case BuiltinType::Short: 7510 return UnsignedShortTy; 7511 case BuiltinType::Int: 7512 return UnsignedIntTy; 7513 case BuiltinType::Long: 7514 return UnsignedLongTy; 7515 case BuiltinType::LongLong: 7516 return UnsignedLongLongTy; 7517 case BuiltinType::Int128: 7518 return UnsignedInt128Ty; 7519 default: 7520 llvm_unreachable("Unexpected signed integer type"); 7521 } 7522} 7523 7524ASTMutationListener::~ASTMutationListener() { } 7525 7526void ASTMutationListener::DeducedReturnType(const FunctionDecl *FD, 7527 QualType ReturnType) {} 7528 7529//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 7530// Builtin Type Computation 7531//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 7532 7533/// DecodeTypeFromStr - This decodes one type descriptor from Str, advancing the 7534/// pointer over the consumed characters. This returns the resultant type. If 7535/// AllowTypeModifiers is false then modifier like * are not parsed, just basic 7536/// types. This allows "v2i*" to be parsed as a pointer to a v2i instead of 7537/// a vector of "i*". 7538/// 7539/// RequiresICE is filled in on return to indicate whether the value is required 7540/// to be an Integer Constant Expression. 7541static QualType DecodeTypeFromStr(const char *&Str, const ASTContext &Context, 7542 ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError &Error, 7543 bool &RequiresICE, 7544 bool AllowTypeModifiers) { 7545 // Modifiers. 7546 int HowLong = 0; 7547 bool Signed = false, Unsigned = false; 7548 RequiresICE = false; 7549 7550 // Read the prefixed modifiers first. 7551 bool Done = false; 7552 while (!Done) { 7553 switch (*Str++) { 7554 default: Done = true; --Str; break; 7555 case 'I': 7556 RequiresICE = true; 7557 break; 7558 case 'S': 7559 assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!"); 7560 assert(!Signed && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!"); 7561 Signed = true; 7562 break; 7563 case 'U': 7564 assert(!Signed && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!"); 7565 assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!"); 7566 Unsigned = true; 7567 break; 7568 case 'L': 7569 assert(HowLong <= 2 && "Can't have LLLL modifier"); 7570 ++HowLong; 7571 break; 7572 } 7573 } 7574 7575 QualType Type; 7576 7577 // Read the base type. 7578 switch (*Str++) { 7579 default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type letter!"); 7580 case 'v': 7581 assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && 7582 "Bad modifiers used with 'v'!"); 7583 Type = Context.VoidTy; 7584 break; 7585 case 'h': 7586 assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && 7587 "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!"); 7588 Type = Context.HalfTy; 7589 break; 7590 case 'f': 7591 assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && 7592 "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!"); 7593 Type = Context.FloatTy; 7594 break; 7595 case 'd': 7596 assert(HowLong < 2 && !Signed && !Unsigned && 7597 "Bad modifiers used with 'd'!"); 7598 if (HowLong) 7599 Type = Context.LongDoubleTy; 7600 else 7601 Type = Context.DoubleTy; 7602 break; 7603 case 's': 7604 assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 's'!"); 7605 if (Unsigned) 7606 Type = Context.UnsignedShortTy; 7607 else 7608 Type = Context.ShortTy; 7609 break; 7610 case 'i': 7611 if (HowLong == 3) 7612 Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedInt128Ty : Context.Int128Ty; 7613 else if (HowLong == 2) 7614 Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongLongTy : Context.LongLongTy; 7615 else if (HowLong == 1) 7616 Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongTy : Context.LongTy; 7617 else 7618 Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedIntTy : Context.IntTy; 7619 break; 7620 case 'c': 7621 assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 'c'!"); 7622 if (Signed) 7623 Type = Context.SignedCharTy; 7624 else if (Unsigned) 7625 Type = Context.UnsignedCharTy; 7626 else 7627 Type = Context.CharTy; 7628 break; 7629 case 'b': // boolean 7630 assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'b'!"); 7631 Type = Context.BoolTy; 7632 break; 7633 case 'z': // size_t. 7634 assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'z'!"); 7635 Type = Context.getSizeType(); 7636 break; 7637 case 'F': 7638 Type = Context.getCFConstantStringType(); 7639 break; 7640 case 'G': 7641 Type = Context.getObjCIdType(); 7642 break; 7643 case 'H': 7644 Type = Context.getObjCSelType(); 7645 break; 7646 case 'M': 7647 Type = Context.getObjCSuperType(); 7648 break; 7649 case 'a': 7650 Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType(); 7651 assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!"); 7652 break; 7653 case 'A': 7654 // This is a "reference" to a va_list; however, what exactly 7655 // this means depends on how va_list is defined. There are two 7656 // different kinds of va_list: ones passed by value, and ones 7657 // passed by reference. An example of a by-value va_list is 7658 // x86, where va_list is a char*. An example of by-ref va_list 7659 // is x86-64, where va_list is a __va_list_tag[1]. For x86, 7660 // we want this argument to be a char*&; for x86-64, we want 7661 // it to be a __va_list_tag*. 7662 Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType(); 7663 assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!"); 7664 if (Type->isArrayType()) 7665 Type = Context.getArrayDecayedType(Type); 7666 else 7667 Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type); 7668 break; 7669 case 'V': { 7670 char *End; 7671 unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10); 7672 assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size"); 7673 Str = End; 7674 7675 QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, 7676 RequiresICE, false); 7677 assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require vector ICE"); 7678 7679 // TODO: No way to make AltiVec vectors in builtins yet. 7680 Type = Context.getVectorType(ElementType, NumElements, 7681 VectorType::GenericVector); 7682 break; 7683 } 7684 case 'E': { 7685 char *End; 7686 7687 unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10); 7688 assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size"); 7689 7690 Str = End; 7691 7692 QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE, 7693 false); 7694 Type = Context.getExtVectorType(ElementType, NumElements); 7695 break; 7696 } 7697 case 'X': { 7698 QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE, 7699 false); 7700 assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require complex ICE"); 7701 Type = Context.getComplexType(ElementType); 7702 break; 7703 } 7704 case 'Y' : { 7705 Type = Context.getPointerDiffType(); 7706 break; 7707 } 7708 case 'P': 7709 Type = Context.getFILEType(); 7710 if (Type.isNull()) { 7711 Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_stdio; 7712 return QualType(); 7713 } 7714 break; 7715 case 'J': 7716 if (Signed) 7717 Type = Context.getsigjmp_bufType(); 7718 else 7719 Type = Context.getjmp_bufType(); 7720 7721 if (Type.isNull()) { 7722 Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_setjmp; 7723 return QualType(); 7724 } 7725 break; 7726 case 'K': 7727 assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'K'!"); 7728 Type = Context.getucontext_tType(); 7729 7730 if (Type.isNull()) { 7731 Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_ucontext; 7732 return QualType(); 7733 } 7734 break; 7735 case 'p': 7736 Type = Context.getProcessIDType(); 7737 break; 7738 } 7739 7740 // If there are modifiers and if we're allowed to parse them, go for it. 7741 Done = !AllowTypeModifiers; 7742 while (!Done) { 7743 switch (char c = *Str++) { 7744 default: Done = true; --Str; break; 7745 case '*': 7746 case '&': { 7747 // Both pointers and references can have their pointee types 7748 // qualified with an address space. 7749 char *End; 7750 unsigned AddrSpace = strtoul(Str, &End, 10); 7751 if (End != Str && AddrSpace != 0) { 7752 Type = Context.getAddrSpaceQualType(Type, AddrSpace); 7753 Str = End; 7754 } 7755 if (c == '*') 7756 Type = Context.getPointerType(Type); 7757 else 7758 Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type); 7759 break; 7760 } 7761 // FIXME: There's no way to have a built-in with an rvalue ref arg. 7762 case 'C': 7763 Type = Type.withConst(); 7764 break; 7765 case 'D': 7766 Type = Context.getVolatileType(Type); 7767 break; 7768 case 'R': 7769 Type = Type.withRestrict(); 7770 break; 7771 } 7772 } 7773 7774 assert((!RequiresICE || Type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) && 7775 "Integer constant 'I' type must be an integer"); 7776 7777 return Type; 7778} 7779 7780/// GetBuiltinType - Return the type for the specified builtin. 7781QualType ASTContext::GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id, 7782 GetBuiltinTypeError &Error, 7783 unsigned *IntegerConstantArgs) const { 7784 const char *TypeStr = BuiltinInfo.GetTypeString(Id); 7785 7786 SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes; 7787 7788 bool RequiresICE = false; 7789 Error = GE_None; 7790 QualType ResType = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, 7791 RequiresICE, true); 7792 if (Error != GE_None) 7793 return QualType(); 7794 7795 assert(!RequiresICE && "Result of intrinsic cannot be required to be an ICE"); 7796 7797 while (TypeStr[0] && TypeStr[0] != '.') { 7798 QualType Ty = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, RequiresICE, true); 7799 if (Error != GE_None) 7800 return QualType(); 7801 7802 // If this argument is required to be an IntegerConstantExpression and the 7803 // caller cares, fill in the bitmask we return. 7804 if (RequiresICE && IntegerConstantArgs) 7805 *IntegerConstantArgs |= 1 << ArgTypes.size(); 7806 7807 // Do array -> pointer decay. The builtin should use the decayed type. 7808 if (Ty->isArrayType()) 7809 Ty = getArrayDecayedType(Ty); 7810 7811 ArgTypes.push_back(Ty); 7812 } 7813 7814 assert((TypeStr[0] != '.' || TypeStr[1] == 0) && 7815 "'.' should only occur at end of builtin type list!"); 7816 7817 FunctionType::ExtInfo EI(CC_C); 7818 if (BuiltinInfo.isNoReturn(Id)) EI = EI.withNoReturn(true); 7819 7820 bool Variadic = (TypeStr[0] == '.'); 7821 7822 // We really shouldn't be making a no-proto type here, especially in C++. 7823 if (ArgTypes.empty() && Variadic) 7824 return getFunctionNoProtoType(ResType, EI); 7825 7826 FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI; 7827 EPI.ExtInfo = EI; 7828 EPI.Variadic = Variadic; 7829 7830 return getFunctionType(ResType, ArgTypes, EPI); 7831} 7832 7833GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl *FD) { 7834 if (!FD->isExternallyVisible()) 7835 return GVA_Internal; 7836 7837 GVALinkage External = GVA_StrongExternal; 7838 switch (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) { 7839 case TSK_Undeclared: 7840 case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization: 7841 External = GVA_StrongExternal; 7842 break; 7843 7844 case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition: 7845 return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation; 7846 7847 case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration: 7848 case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation: 7849 External = GVA_TemplateInstantiation; 7850 break; 7851 } 7852 7853 if (!FD->isInlined()) 7854 return External; 7855 7856 if ((!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && !getLangOpts().MicrosoftMode) || 7857 FD->hasAttr<GNUInlineAttr>()) { 7858 // GNU or C99 inline semantics. Determine whether this symbol should be 7859 // externally visible. 7860 if (FD->isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible()) 7861 return External; 7862 7863 // C99 inline semantics, where the symbol is not externally visible. 7864 return GVA_C99Inline; 7865 } 7866 7867 // C++0x [temp.explicit]p9: 7868 // [ Note: The intent is that an inline function that is the subject of 7869 // an explicit instantiation declaration will still be implicitly 7870 // instantiated when used so that the body can be considered for 7871 // inlining, but that no out-of-line copy of the inline function would be 7872 // generated in the translation unit. -- end note ] 7873 if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() 7874 == TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration) 7875 return GVA_C99Inline; 7876 7877 return GVA_CXXInline; 7878} 7879 7880GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl *VD) { 7881 if (!VD->isExternallyVisible()) 7882 return GVA_Internal; 7883 7884 switch (VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) { 7885 case TSK_Undeclared: 7886 case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization: 7887 return GVA_StrongExternal; 7888 7889 case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration: 7890 llvm_unreachable("Variable should not be instantiated"); 7891 // Fall through to treat this like any other instantiation. 7892 7893 case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition: 7894 return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation; 7895 7896 case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation: 7897 return GVA_TemplateInstantiation; 7898 } 7899 7900 llvm_unreachable("Invalid Linkage!"); 7901} 7902 7903bool ASTContext::DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl *D) { 7904 if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) { 7905 if (!VD->isFileVarDecl()) 7906 return false; 7907 } else if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) { 7908 // We never need to emit an uninstantiated function template. 7909 if (FD->getTemplatedKind() == FunctionDecl::TK_FunctionTemplate) 7910 return false; 7911 } else 7912 return false; 7913 7914 // If this is a member of a class template, we do not need to emit it. 7915 if (D->getDeclContext()->isDependentContext()) 7916 return false; 7917 7918 // Weak references don't produce any output by themselves. 7919 if (D->hasAttr<WeakRefAttr>()) 7920 return false; 7921 7922 // Aliases and used decls are required. 7923 if (D->hasAttr<AliasAttr>() || D->hasAttr<UsedAttr>()) 7924 return true; 7925 7926 if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) { 7927 // Forward declarations aren't required. 7928 if (!FD->doesThisDeclarationHaveABody()) 7929 return FD->doesDeclarationForceExternallyVisibleDefinition(); 7930 7931 // Constructors and destructors are required. 7932 if (FD->hasAttr<ConstructorAttr>() || FD->hasAttr<DestructorAttr>()) 7933 return true; 7934 7935 // The key function for a class is required. This rule only comes 7936 // into play when inline functions can be key functions, though. 7937 if (getTargetInfo().getCXXABI().canKeyFunctionBeInline()) { 7938 if (const CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FD)) { 7939 const CXXRecordDecl *RD = MD->getParent(); 7940 if (MD->isOutOfLine() && RD->isDynamicClass()) { 7941 const CXXMethodDecl *KeyFunc = getCurrentKeyFunction(RD); 7942 if (KeyFunc && KeyFunc->getCanonicalDecl() == MD->getCanonicalDecl()) 7943 return true; 7944 } 7945 } 7946 } 7947 7948 GVALinkage Linkage = GetGVALinkageForFunction(FD); 7949 7950 // static, static inline, always_inline, and extern inline functions can 7951 // always be deferred. Normal inline functions can be deferred in C99/C++. 7952 // Implicit template instantiations can also be deferred in C++. 7953 if (Linkage == GVA_Internal || Linkage == GVA_C99Inline || 7954 Linkage == GVA_CXXInline || Linkage == GVA_TemplateInstantiation) 7955 return false; 7956 return true; 7957 } 7958 7959 const VarDecl *VD = cast<VarDecl>(D); 7960 assert(VD->isFileVarDecl() && "Expected file scoped var"); 7961 7962 if (VD->isThisDeclarationADefinition() == VarDecl::DeclarationOnly) 7963 return false; 7964 7965 // Variables that can be needed in other TUs are required. 7966 GVALinkage L = GetGVALinkageForVariable(VD); 7967 if (L != GVA_Internal && L != GVA_TemplateInstantiation) 7968 return true; 7969 7970 // Variables that have destruction with side-effects are required. 7971 if (VD->getType().isDestructedType()) 7972 return true; 7973 7974 // Variables that have initialization with side-effects are required. 7975 if (VD->getInit() && VD->getInit()->HasSideEffects(*this)) 7976 return true; 7977 7978 return false; 7979} 7980 7981CallingConv ASTContext::getDefaultCallingConvention(bool IsVariadic, 7982 bool IsCXXMethod) const { 7983 // Pass through to the C++ ABI object 7984 if (IsCXXMethod) 7985 return ABI->getDefaultMethodCallConv(IsVariadic); 7986 7987 return (LangOpts.MRTD && !IsVariadic) ? CC_X86StdCall : CC_C; 7988} 7989 7990bool ASTContext::isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl *RD) const { 7991 // Pass through to the C++ ABI object 7992 return ABI->isNearlyEmpty(RD); 7993} 7994 7995MangleContext *ASTContext::createMangleContext() { 7996 switch (Target->getCXXABI().getKind()) { 7997 case TargetCXXABI::GenericAArch64: 7998 case TargetCXXABI::GenericItanium: 7999 case TargetCXXABI::GenericARM: 8000 case TargetCXXABI::iOS: 8001 return ItaniumMangleContext::create(*this, getDiagnostics()); 8002 case TargetCXXABI::Microsoft: 8003 return MicrosoftMangleContext::create(*this, getDiagnostics()); 8004 } 8005 llvm_unreachable("Unsupported ABI"); 8006} 8007 8008CXXABI::~CXXABI() {} 8009 8010size_t ASTContext::getSideTableAllocatedMemory() const { 8011 return ASTRecordLayouts.getMemorySize() + 8012 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCLayouts) + 8013 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(KeyFunctions) + 8014 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCImpls) + 8015 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(BlockVarCopyInits) + 8016 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(DeclAttrs) + 8017 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(TemplateOrInstantiation) + 8018 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingDecl) + 8019 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl) + 8020 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl) + 8021 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(OverriddenMethods) + 8022 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(Types) + 8023 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(VariableArrayTypes) + 8024 llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ClassScopeSpecializationPattern); 8025} 8026 8027/// getIntTypeForBitwidth - 8028/// sets integer QualTy according to specified details: 8029/// bitwidth, signed/unsigned. 8030/// Returns empty type if there is no appropriate target types. 8031QualType ASTContext::getIntTypeForBitwidth(unsigned DestWidth, 8032 unsigned Signed) const { 8033 TargetInfo::IntType Ty = getTargetInfo().getIntTypeByWidth(DestWidth, Signed); 8034 CanQualType QualTy = getFromTargetType(Ty); 8035 if (!QualTy && DestWidth == 128) 8036 return Signed ? Int128Ty : UnsignedInt128Ty; 8037 return QualTy; 8038} 8039 8040/// getRealTypeForBitwidth - 8041/// sets floating point QualTy according to specified bitwidth. 8042/// Returns empty type if there is no appropriate target types. 8043QualType ASTContext::getRealTypeForBitwidth(unsigned DestWidth) const { 8044 TargetInfo::RealType Ty = getTargetInfo().getRealTypeByWidth(DestWidth); 8045 switch (Ty) { 8046 case TargetInfo::Float: 8047 return FloatTy; 8048 case TargetInfo::Double: 8049 return DoubleTy; 8050 case TargetInfo::LongDouble: 8051 return LongDoubleTy; 8052 case TargetInfo::NoFloat: 8053 return QualType(); 8054 } 8055 8056 llvm_unreachable("Unhandled TargetInfo::RealType value"); 8057} 8058 8059void ASTContext::setManglingNumber(const NamedDecl *ND, unsigned Number) { 8060 if (Number > 1) 8061 MangleNumbers[ND] = Number; 8062} 8063 8064unsigned ASTContext::getManglingNumber(const NamedDecl *ND) const { 8065 llvm::DenseMap<const NamedDecl *, unsigned>::const_iterator I = 8066 MangleNumbers.find(ND); 8067 return I != MangleNumbers.end() ? I->second : 1; 8068} 8069 8070MangleNumberingContext & 8071ASTContext::getManglingNumberContext(const DeclContext *DC) { 8072 assert(LangOpts.CPlusPlus); // We don't need mangling numbers for plain C. 8073 MangleNumberingContext *&MCtx = MangleNumberingContexts[DC]; 8074 if (!MCtx) 8075 MCtx = createMangleNumberingContext(); 8076 return *MCtx; 8077} 8078 8079MangleNumberingContext *ASTContext::createMangleNumberingContext() const { 8080 return ABI->createMangleNumberingContext(); 8081} 8082 8083void ASTContext::setParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D, unsigned int index) { 8084 ParamIndices[D] = index; 8085} 8086 8087unsigned ASTContext::getParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D) const { 8088 ParameterIndexTable::const_iterator I = ParamIndices.find(D); 8089 assert(I != ParamIndices.end() && 8090 "ParmIndices lacks entry set by ParmVarDecl"); 8091 return I->second; 8092} 8093 8094APValue * 8095ASTContext::getMaterializedTemporaryValue(const MaterializeTemporaryExpr *E, 8096 bool MayCreate) { 8097 assert(E && E->getStorageDuration() == SD_Static && 8098 "don't need to cache the computed value for this temporary"); 8099 if (MayCreate) 8100 return &MaterializedTemporaryValues[E]; 8101 8102 llvm::DenseMap<const MaterializeTemporaryExpr *, APValue>::iterator I = 8103 MaterializedTemporaryValues.find(E); 8104 return I == MaterializedTemporaryValues.end() ? 0 : &I->second; 8105} 8106 8107bool ASTContext::AtomicUsesUnsupportedLibcall(const AtomicExpr *E) const { 8108 const llvm::Triple &T = getTargetInfo().getTriple(); 8109 if (!T.isOSDarwin()) 8110 return false; 8111 8112 if (!(T.isiOS() && T.isOSVersionLT(7)) && 8113 !(T.isMacOSX() && T.isOSVersionLT(10, 9))) 8114 return false; 8115 8116 QualType AtomicTy = E->getPtr()->getType()->getPointeeType(); 8117 CharUnits sizeChars = getTypeSizeInChars(AtomicTy); 8118 uint64_t Size = sizeChars.getQuantity(); 8119 CharUnits alignChars = getTypeAlignInChars(AtomicTy); 8120 unsigned Align = alignChars.getQuantity(); 8121 unsigned MaxInlineWidthInBits = getTargetInfo().getMaxAtomicInlineWidth(); 8122 return (Size != Align || toBits(sizeChars) > MaxInlineWidthInBits); 8123} 8124 8125namespace { 8126 8127 /// \brief A \c RecursiveASTVisitor that builds a map from nodes to their 8128 /// parents as defined by the \c RecursiveASTVisitor. 8129 /// 8130 /// Note that the relationship described here is purely in terms of AST 8131 /// traversal - there are other relationships (for example declaration context) 8132 /// in the AST that are better modeled by special matchers. 8133 /// 8134 /// FIXME: Currently only builds up the map using \c Stmt and \c Decl nodes. 8135 class ParentMapASTVisitor : public RecursiveASTVisitor<ParentMapASTVisitor> { 8136 8137 public: 8138 /// \brief Builds and returns the translation unit's parent map. 8139 /// 8140 /// The caller takes ownership of the returned \c ParentMap. 8141 static ASTContext::ParentMap *buildMap(TranslationUnitDecl &TU) { 8142 ParentMapASTVisitor Visitor(new ASTContext::ParentMap); 8143 Visitor.TraverseDecl(&TU); 8144 return Visitor.Parents; 8145 } 8146 8147 private: 8148 typedef RecursiveASTVisitor<ParentMapASTVisitor> VisitorBase; 8149 8150 ParentMapASTVisitor(ASTContext::ParentMap *Parents) : Parents(Parents) { 8151 } 8152 8153 bool shouldVisitTemplateInstantiations() const { 8154 return true; 8155 } 8156 bool shouldVisitImplicitCode() const { 8157 return true; 8158 } 8159 // Disables data recursion. We intercept Traverse* methods in the RAV, which 8160 // are not triggered during data recursion. 8161 bool shouldUseDataRecursionFor(clang::Stmt *S) const { 8162 return false; 8163 } 8164 8165 template <typename T> 8166 bool TraverseNode(T *Node, bool(VisitorBase:: *traverse) (T *)) { 8167 if (Node == NULL) 8168 return true; 8169 if (ParentStack.size() > 0) 8170 // FIXME: Currently we add the same parent multiple times, for example 8171 // when we visit all subexpressions of template instantiations; this is 8172 // suboptimal, bug benign: the only way to visit those is with 8173 // hasAncestor / hasParent, and those do not create new matches. 8174 // The plan is to enable DynTypedNode to be storable in a map or hash 8175 // map. The main problem there is to implement hash functions / 8176 // comparison operators for all types that DynTypedNode supports that 8177 // do not have pointer identity. 8178 (*Parents)[Node].push_back(ParentStack.back()); 8179 ParentStack.push_back(ast_type_traits::DynTypedNode::create(*Node)); 8180 bool Result = (this ->* traverse) (Node); 8181 ParentStack.pop_back(); 8182 return Result; 8183 } 8184 8185 bool TraverseDecl(Decl *DeclNode) { 8186 return TraverseNode(DeclNode, &VisitorBase::TraverseDecl); 8187 } 8188 8189 bool TraverseStmt(Stmt *StmtNode) { 8190 return TraverseNode(StmtNode, &VisitorBase::TraverseStmt); 8191 } 8192 8193 ASTContext::ParentMap *Parents; 8194 llvm::SmallVector<ast_type_traits::DynTypedNode, 16> ParentStack; 8195 8196 friend class RecursiveASTVisitor<ParentMapASTVisitor>; 8197 }; 8198 8199} // end namespace 8200 8201ASTContext::ParentVector 8202ASTContext::getParents(const ast_type_traits::DynTypedNode &Node) { 8203 assert(Node.getMemoizationData() && 8204 "Invariant broken: only nodes that support memoization may be " 8205 "used in the parent map."); 8206 if (!AllParents) { 8207 // We always need to run over the whole translation unit, as 8208 // hasAncestor can escape any subtree. 8209 AllParents.reset( 8210 ParentMapASTVisitor::buildMap(*getTranslationUnitDecl())); 8211 } 8212 ParentMap::const_iterator I = AllParents->find(Node.getMemoizationData()); 8213 if (I == AllParents->end()) { 8214 return ParentVector(); 8215 } 8216 return I->second; 8217} 8218 8219bool 8220ASTContext::ObjCMethodsAreEqual(const ObjCMethodDecl *MethodDecl, 8221 const ObjCMethodDecl *MethodImpl) { 8222 // No point trying to match an unavailable/deprecated mothod. 8223 if (MethodDecl->hasAttr<UnavailableAttr>() 8224 || MethodDecl->hasAttr<DeprecatedAttr>()) 8225 return false; 8226 if (MethodDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier() != 8227 MethodImpl->getObjCDeclQualifier()) 8228 return false; 8229 if (!hasSameType(MethodDecl->getResultType(), 8230 MethodImpl->getResultType())) 8231 return false; 8232 8233 if (MethodDecl->param_size() != MethodImpl->param_size()) 8234 return false; 8235 8236 for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator IM = MethodImpl->param_begin(), 8237 IF = MethodDecl->param_begin(), EM = MethodImpl->param_end(), 8238 EF = MethodDecl->param_end(); 8239 IM != EM && IF != EF; ++IM, ++IF) { 8240 const ParmVarDecl *DeclVar = (*IF); 8241 const ParmVarDecl *ImplVar = (*IM); 8242 if (ImplVar->getObjCDeclQualifier() != DeclVar->getObjCDeclQualifier()) 8243 return false; 8244 if (!hasSameType(DeclVar->getType(), ImplVar->getType())) 8245 return false; 8246 } 8247 return (MethodDecl->isVariadic() == MethodImpl->isVariadic()); 8248 8249} 8250